Container Refrigeration

OPERATIONS AND SERVICE

MANUAL
For
PrimeLINE
69NT40-571-001 to 199
PrimeLINE ONE TM
69NT40-575-001 to 199
Container Refrigeration Units

T-372 Rev B
 OPERATIONS AND SERVICE
MANUAL
For
PrimeLINE
69NT40-571-000 to 199

PrimeLINE ONE
69NT40-575-000 to 199

Container Refrigeration Units

© 2020 Carrier Corporation ● Printed in USA December 2020

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH NUMBER PAGE

SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 FIRST AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.5 SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 REFRIGERANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4.1 Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4.2 Temperature Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4.3 Pressure Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4.4 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.5 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.6 Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.7 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.8 Plate Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.5 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.5.1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.5.2 Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.5.3 USDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.5.4 Interrogator Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.5.5 Quest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.5.6 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.7 Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.8 Water Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.9 Back Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.10 460 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.11 230 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.12 Cable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.13 Upper Fresh Air Makeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.14 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.15 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.16 Condenser Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.17 EverFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.18 TripWise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.19 FuelWise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.3 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

i T-372
 3.1.4 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.1.6 Water-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.1.7 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.3 ELECTRICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.5.1 Standard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.5.2 Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.5.3 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.1 Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.2 Display Module and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.3 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.3.1 Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.3.2 Start Up - Compressor Bump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.3 Perishable Mode (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.4 Perishable Pulldown Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.5 Perishable Steady State Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.6 Perishable Idle Mode (Air Circulation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.7 Perishable Heating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.10 Perishable Economy Fan Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.14 Frozen Mode (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.15 Frozen Steady State Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.20 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.21 Defrost Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.22 Defrost Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.23 Protection Mode - Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.24 Protection Mode - Failure Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.25 Protection Mode - Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.26 Protection Mode - Compressor High Temperature Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.27 Protection Mode - Compressor Low Pressure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.28 Protection Mode - Perishable Mode System Pressure Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.29 Protection Mode - Condenser Fan Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13

T-372 ii
 4.3.30 Quest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.4 CONTROLLER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.5 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.6 DATACORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.6.2 DataCORDER Operational Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.6.3 DataCORDER Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.6.4 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.6.5 Logging Interval (dCF03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.6.6 Thermistor Format (dCF04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4.6.7 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4.6.8 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4.6.9 Stored Temperature Display (Scrollback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4.6.10 DataCORDER Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4.6.11 Pre-Trip Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.6.12 USDA Cold Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.6.13 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.6.14 ISO Trip Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.6.15 DataCORDER Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.7 CONTROLLER COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
4.7.1 Controller Wired Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
4.7.2 Controller Wireless Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
4.8 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
4.9 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
4.10 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37
4.11 CONTROLLER PRE-TRIP TEST CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 CONNECT POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.1 Connecting to 380/460 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.2 Connecting to 190/230 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.2 Vent Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.4 EVERFRESH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.5 CONNECT WATER-COOLED CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.5.1 Water-Cooled Condenser with Water Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.5.2 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.6 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.6.1 Starting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.6.2 Stopping the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.7 START-UP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.7.1 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.7.2 Check Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.7.3 Start Temperature Recorder in DataCORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.7.4 Complete Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.8 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.8.1 Starting a Pre-Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6

iii T-372
 5.8.2 Displaying Pre-Trip Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.9 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.10 TRIPWISE (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.10.1 Checking TripWise Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.10.2 Enabling or Disabling TripWise Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.10.3 TripWise Status Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5.11 AUTOMATIC COLD TREATMENT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.12 AUTOMATIC SETPOINT CHANGE (ASC) CD53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.11 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.12 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.13 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER OR WATER PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.14 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.15 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.16 ABNORMAL CURRENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2.1 Evacuating the Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3.1 Connecting the Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.3.2 Removing the Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.4 PUMP DOWN THE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.4.1 Automatic Pump Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.4.2 Manual Pump Down: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.3 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Complete System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.4 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Partial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System - Full Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System - Partial Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.8 CONVERTING TO R-513A REFRIGERANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.9 COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.9.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.10 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10

T-372 iv
 7.10.1 Checking High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.10.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.11 CONDENSER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.11.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.11.2 Condenser Coil Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.11.3 Condenser Coil Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.11.4 Condenser Coil Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.12 CONDENSER FAN AND FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.12.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove and Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.13 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.13.1 Cleaning Supplies Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.13.2 Cleaning Procedure Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.13.3 Cleaning Procedure Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.14 FILTER DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.14.1 Checking the Filter Drier: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.14.2 Replacing the Filter Drier: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.15 EVAPORATOR COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.15.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.16 EVAPORATOR HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.16.1 Megger Testing the Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.17 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.17.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.17.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.17.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.18 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.18.1 Cleaning Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.18.2 Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.19 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (EEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.19.1 Removing an EEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.19.2 Installing an EEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.20 HUMIDITY SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.20.1 Checking the Operation of the Humidity Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.21 ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.21.1 Removing a Solenoid Valve Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.21.2 Removing the Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.21.3 Installing the Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.21.4 Installing the Solenoid Valve Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.22 ECONOMIZER EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.22.1 Removing the Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.22.2 Installing the Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.23 TROUBLESHOOTING P6-7 (DUV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.24 DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (DUV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.24.1 Removing the DUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.24.2 Installing the DUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.25 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.26 AUTOTRANSFORMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.27 CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.27.1 Handling Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30

v T-372
 7.27.2 Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.27.3 Loading Controller Operational Software from a USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.27.4 Uploading a Software Configuration from a USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.27.5 Downloading DataCORDER Data to a USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.27.6 Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.27.7 Setting the Container ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.27.8 Removing and Installing a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.27.9 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.28 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
7.28.1 Ice Bath Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
7.28.2 Sensor Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
7.28.3 GDP Supply and Return Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
7.28.4 Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.28.5 Sensor STS and SRS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
7.28.6 Sensor RTS and RRS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
7.28.7 Sensor DTS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
7.28.8 Sensor ETS1 and ETS2 Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
7.28.9 Sensor, CPDS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
7.29 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
7.30 EVERFRESH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
7.31 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
WIRELESS CERTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
INDEX .......................................................................... INDEX–1

T-372 vi
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section ................................................. 3–1

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section ............................................................ 3–2
Figure 3.3 Compressor Section ........................................................... 3–3
Figure 3.4 Air Cooled Condenser Section ................................................... 3–4
Figure 3.5 Brazed Plate Water-Cooled Condenser ............................................ 3–5
Figure 3.6 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Figure 3.7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Standard Operation ................................ 3–11
Figure 3.8 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
Figure 3.9 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Water-Cooled Condenser (Brazed Plate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
Figure 4.1 Control Module ............................................................... 4–1
Figure 4.2 Display Module ............................................................... 4–2
Figure 4.3 Keypad ..................................................................... 4–2
Figure 4.4 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode ............................................ 4–5
Figure 4.5 Perishable Mode Cooling ....................................................... 4–7
Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Heating ....................................................... 4–8
Figure 4.7 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode ............................................... 4–9
Figure 4.8 Frozen Mode ................................................................ 4–10
Figure 4.9 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
Figure 4.10 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
Figure 4.11 DataCORDER Configuration Screen ............................................ 4–20
Figure 4.12 DataCorder Probe Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
Figure 4.13 DataCorder Probe Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
Figure 4.14 DataCORDER Systems Tool Screen ............................................ 4–22
Figure 4.15 DataLINE and DataLINE Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
Figure 5.1 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
Figure 5.2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart .............................................. 5–3
Figure 5.3 TripWise Status in DataCORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
Figure 5.4 Generating TripWise Summary Report ............................................. 5–9
Figure 5.5 TripWise Summary Report ..................................................... 5–10
Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
Figure 7.2 Manifold Gauge/Hose Set ....................................................... 7–2
Figure 7.3 Service Valve ................................................................ 7–3
Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
Figure 7.5 Compressor Kit ............................................................... 7–9
Figure 7.6 High Pressure Switch Testing ................................................... 7–10
Figure 7.7 Condenser Fan Position ....................................................... 7–13
Figure 7.8 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning - Forced Circulation .............................. 7–15
Figure 7.9 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning - Gravity Circulation .............................. 7–16
Figure 7.10 Heater Arrangement ......................................................... 7–17
Figure 7.11 Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
Figure 7.12 Access Panel Torque Pattern .................................................. 7–21
Figure 7.13 Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23

vii T-372
Figure 7.14 Humidity Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
Figure 7.15 Access Panel Torque Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
Figure 7.16 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
Figure 7.17 Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
Figure 7.18 Adapter and O-Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
Figure 7.19 View of Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
Figure 7.20 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
Figure 7.21 Supply Sensors - Cover Assembly and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
Figure 7.22 Removing Front Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.23 Removing Evaporator Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.24 Return Sensors - Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.25 Return Sensors - Cutting Wire Ties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
Figure 7.26 DataLINE - Probe Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
Figure 7.27 DataLINE - Calibrate Sensors Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
Figure 7.28 DataLINE - Enter Service Center Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
Figure 7.29 Ice Bath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
Figure 7.30 DataLINE - Start Cal Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
Figure 7.31 DataLINE - Calibration Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
Figure 7.32 Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
Figure 7.33 Sensor and Cable Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
Figure 7.34 Supply Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
Figure 7.35 Return Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
Figure 7.36 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
Figure 7.37 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
Figure 8.1 Legend - Standard Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
Figure 8.2 Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
Figure 8.3 Unit Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Figure 8.4 Unit Wiring Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4

T-372 viii
 LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page

Table 3–1 Refrigeration System Data ...................................................... 3–7

Table 3–2 Electrical Data ................................................................ 3–7
Table 3–3 Safety and Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
Table 4–1 Display Module LEDs .......................................................... 4–2
Table 4–2 Keypad Function .............................................................. 4–2
Table 4–3 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments ........................................ 4–16
Table 4–4 DataCORDER Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
Table 4–5 DataCORDER Standard Configurations ........................................... 4–17
Table 4–6 Wireless Settings Menu (nEt) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
Table 4–7 Controller Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
Table 4–9 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes .................................................. 4–53
Table 4–10 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records .......................................... 4–59
Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays for Cd41 “SELCt” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance - AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS ......................... 7–36
Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance - PrimeLINE CPDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
Table 7–4 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart .................................... 7–48
Table 7–5 R-513A Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
Table 7–6 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel) . . . . . . . . . . 7–54

ix T-372
 SECTION 1
SAFETY SUMMARY

1.1 General Safety Notices

Installation and servicing of refrigeration equipment can be hazardous due to system pressures and electrical
components. Only trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or service refrigeration equipment.
When working on refrigeration equipment, observe all potential Danger, Warning and Caution hazards, including
those shown below and on hazard labels attached to the unit.
The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in this
manual. They are recommended precautions that must be understood and applied during operation and
maintenance of the equipment covered herein. The general safety notices are presented in the following three
sections labeled: First Aid, Operating Precautions and Maintenance Precautions. A listing of the specific warnings
and cautions appearing elsewhere in the manual follows the general safety notices.

1.2 First Aid

An injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.

1.3 Operating Precautions

Always wear safety glasses.
Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of the evaporator and condenser fans.
Wear appropriate personal protective equipment for the work being undertaken.
No work should be performed on the unit until all circuit breakers and Start-Stop switches are turned off, and power
supply is disconnected.
In case of severe vibration or unusual noise, stop the unit and investigate.

1.4 Maintenance Precautions

Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. Do not open the condenser fan grille or
evaporator access panels before turning power off, disconnecting and securing the power plug.
Be sure power is turned off before working on motors, controllers, solenoid valves and electrical control switches.
Tag circuit breaker and power supply to prevent accidental energizing of circuit.
Do not bypass any electrical safety devices, e.g. bridging an overload, or using any sort of jumper wires. Problems
with the system should be diagnosed, and any necessary repairs performed by qualified service personnel.
When performing any arc welding on the unit or container, disconnect all wire harness connectors from the
modules in control boxes. Do not remove wire harness from the modules unless you are grounded to the unit frame
with a static safe wrist strap.
In case of electrical fire, open circuit switch and extinguish with CO2 (never use water).

1.5 Specific Hazard Statements

To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation is
given with the appropriate consequences:
DANGER - means an immediate hazard that WILL result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING - means to warn against hazards or unsafe conditions that COULD result in severe personal injury or
death.
CAUTION - means to warn against potential hazard or unsafe practice that could result in personal injury, product
or property damage.

1–1 T-372
The statements listed below are applicable to the refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this manual. These
recommended precautions must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of the equipment
covered herein.

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal injury
and / or property damage. Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing or
operating the product. Charge only with refrigerants R-134a or R-513A as specified for the unit
model number: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.

! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compressor unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.

! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF the Start-Stop switch (ST), unit circuit
breaker(s) and external power source.

! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.

! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) (CB-1 & CB-2) and the Start-Stop switch (ST) are in the
“O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.

! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the compressor.

! WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor, be sure to relieve the internal pressure very carefully by
slightly loosening the couplings to break the seal.

! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.

! WARNING
Do not open the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting power plug.

! WARNING
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT PUT WATER
INTO THE ACID - this will cause spattering and excessive heat.

T-372 1–2
 ! WARNING
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution from the skin immediately if accidental contact occurs.
Do not allow the solution to splash onto concrete.

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply before
working on moving parts.

! WARNING
Installation requires wiring to the main unit circuit breaker, CB-1. Make sure the power to the unit is
off and power plug disconnected before beginning installation.

! CAUTION
When charging the unit with R-513A refrigerant, charge as a liquid only. R-513A is an azeotrope
blend containing R-1234yf and R-134a. Charging or topping off as a vapor will result in an
incorrect mixture of blend in the system.

! CAUTION
Charge water-cooled condenser or receiver according to nameplate specifications to ensure
optimal unit performance.

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from controller modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all controller module wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any
part of the container.

! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When PRE-TRIP key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated.
At the completion of pre-trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be
reactivated.

! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting
operator intervention.

! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip test Auto 2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key!

1–3 T-372
 ! CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate in reverse for more than two minutes will result in
internal compressor damage. Turn the Start-Stop switch OFF immediately.

! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set, make sure set is brought to
suction pressure before disconnecting.

! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or
discharge service valves closed (front seated). Internal damage will result from operating the
compressor in a deep vacuum.

! CAUTION
The PrimeLINE unit has a hermetically sealed compressor that should not be opened and/or
repaired. Doing so can cause a loss in performance and premature system failure due to the
precision machinery and assembly required within the compressor. To repair the unit, remove
the faulty compressor and replace with an approved Carrier compressor. If the return of the
compressor is not required, follow local waste collection & recycling regulations in discarding
the compressor.

! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from module unless you are grounded to the unit frame with a
static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all module connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.

! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.

! CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid nicking or cutting wires.

! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance.

T-372 1–4
 SECTION 2
INTRODUCTION
2.1 Introduction
The Carrier Transicold PrimeLINE models 69NT40-571-000 to 199 are of lightweight aluminum frame construction,
designed to be bolted onto the front of a container and serve as the container’s front wall. Forklift pockets are
provided for unit installation and removal.
The Carrier Transicold PrimeLINE ONE™ models 69NT40-575-000 to 199 are units of lightweight aluminum frame
construction, designed to be directly installed on-site onto a welded front wall of a container.
Primeline units are self-contained, all electric units, which include cooling and heating systems to provide precise
temperature control. The units are supplied with a complete charge of refrigerant and compressor lubricating oil,
and are ready for operation upon installation.
The base unit operates on nominal 380/460 volt, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz (Hz) power. An optional autotransformer
may be fitted to allow operation on nominal 190/230, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz power. Control system power is provided
by a transformer which steps the supply power down to 18 and 24 volts, single phase.
The controller is a Carrier Transicold Micro-Link 5 microprocessor. The controller operates automatically to select
cooling, holding or heating as required to maintain the desired set point temperature within very close limits. The
unit may also be equipped with an electronic temperature recorder. The controller has a keypad and display for
viewing or changing operating parameters. The display is also equipped with lights to indicate various modes of
operation.

2.2 Refrigerant
PrimeLINE models 69NT40-571-000 to 099 and PrimeLINE ONE™ models 69NT40-575-000 to 099 are units
designed to only be charged with R-134a refrigerant.
PrimeLINE models 69NT40-571-100 to 199 and PrimeLINE ONE™ models 69NT40-575-100 to 199 are R-513A-
ready units. They are supplied with a complete charge of R-134a refrigerant. But, they are capable of being field
converted to R-513A refrigerant at a later date as requested by the unit owner. R-513A is an azeotrope blend
containing R-1234yf and R-134a. All information in this manual pertaining to R-513A is only applicable to 571-100
to 199 units or 575-100 to 199 units that have either been converted or are being converted to R-513A.
To convert a R-513A-ready unit to R-513A refrigerant, refer to procedure in Service Section 7.8.

2.3 Configuration Identification

Unit identification information is provided on a plate located on the back wall of the condenser section. The plate
provides the unit model number, the unit serial number and the unit parts identification number (PID). The model
number identifies the overall unit configuration, while the PID number provides information on specific optional
equipment, factory provisioned to allow for field installation of optional equipment and differences in detailed parts.

2.4 Feature Descriptions

2.4.1 Control Box
Units are equipped with an aluminum control box, and may be fitted with a lockable door.

2.4.2 Temperature Readout

The unit is fitted with suction and discharge refrigerant temperature sensors. The sensor readings may be viewed
on the controller display.

2.4.3 Pressure Readout

The unit is fitted with evaporator, suction, and discharge pressure transducers. The transducer readings may be
viewed on the controller display.

2–1 T-372
2.4.4 Compressor
The unit is fitted with either an R-134a or an R-513A-ready scroll compressor equipped with suction and discharge
service connections. To identify an R-513A-ready compressor in the field, a green dot is located on the top of the
compressor on the DUV fitting.

2.4.5 Condenser Coil

The unit is fitted with a “C” shape condenser coil.

2.4.6 Evaporator
The evaporator section is equipped with an electronic expansion valve (EEV).

2.4.7 Evaporator Fan Operation

Units are equipped with three-phase evaporator fan motors. Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will
shut down the unit.

2.4.8 Plate Set

Each unit is equipped with a tethered set of wiring schematics and wiring diagram plates. The plate sets are
ordered using a seven-digit base part number and a two-digit dash number.

2.5 Option Descriptions

Various options may be factory or field equipped to the base unit. These options are described in the following sub-
paragraphs.

2.5.1 Battery
The refrigeration controller may be fitted with standard replaceable batteries or a rechargeable battery pack.
Carrier-provided rechargeable batteries can be recharged via the ML5 controller and allow for wireless
communication in battery mode. A non-carrier rechargeable 3-wire battery would charge but the controller will not
monitor anything related to it. A standard 2-wire NiCAD battery would not charge.

NOTE
If ambient temperature is greater than 45 deg C, the carrier-provided rechargeable batteries will not
charge.

2.5.2 Dehumidification
The unit may be fitted with a humidity sensor. This sensor allows setting of a humidity set point in the controller. In
dehumidification mode, the controller will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.

2.5.3 USDA
The unit may be supplied with fittings for additional temperature probes, which allow recording of USDA Cold
Treatment data by the integral DataCORDER function of the Micro-Link refrigeration controller.

2.5.4 Interrogator Receptacle

The unit has one external interrogator receptacle for connection of equipment for calibration. It is located inside the
unit along side the USDA receptacles. It can also be used to download recorded data from the DataCORDER.

NOTE
The Micro-Link 5 controller has a USB micro port and wireless capability to allow viewing of
DataCORDER data.

2.5.5 Quest
Quest (Quality and Energy Efficiency in Storage and Transport) power saving mode helps shipping lines lower their
operating costs by decreasing the system’s run time, energy usage and emissions. Quest is a method of
temperature control used during steady-state perishable cooling that cycles the compressor on and off according to
supply / return air temperature conditions.

T-372 2–2
2.5.6 Autotransformer
An autotransformer may be provided to allow operation on 190/230, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz power. The
autotransformer raises the supply voltage to the nominal 380/460 volt power required by the base unit. The
autotransformer may also be fitted with an individual circuit breaker for the 230 volt power.

2.5.7 Handles
The unit may be equipped with handles to facilitate access to stacked containers. These fixed handles are located
on either side of the unit.

2.5.8 Water Cooling

The refrigeration system may be provisioned for a water-cooled condenser. The condenser is constructed using
copper nickel tube for sea water applications.

2.5.9 Back Panels

Aluminum back panels may have access doors and/or hinge mounting.

2.5.10 460 Volt Cable

Various power cable and plug designs are available for the main 460 volt supply. The plug options tailor the cables
to each customer’s requirements.

2.5.11 230 Volt Cable

Units equipped with an autotransformer require an additional power cable for connection to the 230 volt source.
Various power cable and plug designs are available. The plug options tailor the cables to each customer’s
requirements.

2.5.12 Cable Restraint

Various designs are available for storage of the power cables. These options are variations of the compressor
section cable guard.

2.5.13 Upper Fresh Air Makeup

The unit may be fitted with an upper fresh air makeup assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available with a
Vent Positioning Sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.

2.5.14 Labels
Safety Instruction and Function Code listing labels differ depending on the options installed. Labels available with
additional languages are listed in the parts list.

2.5.15 Controller
The controller is a Carrier Transicold Micro-Link 5 microprocessor. Refer to Section 4.1 for more information.
Controllers will be factory-equipped with the latest version of operational software, but will NOT be configured for a
specific model number and will need to be configured at the time of installation or sale.
Two replacement controllers are available:

1. Re-manufactured - Controller is equivalent of a new OEM controller, supplied with a 12-month warranty.

2. Repaired - Controller has had previous faults repaired and is upgraded with the latest software.

NOTE
Repaired controllers are NOT to be used for warranty repairs; only full OEM Re-manufactured
controllers are to be used.

2.5.16 Condenser Grille

Condenser grilles are direct bolted.

2–3 T-372
2.5.17 EverFRESH
EverFRESH™ is a controlled atmosphere option that is able control container atmosphere by supplying nitrogen
and oxygen into the container space and simultaneously controlling levels of oxygen and carbon dioxide. This
extends the produce ripening process, which increases shelf life and enables longer cargo routes for certain
perishable commodities.
Procedures and technical information related to the EverFRESH controlled atmosphere system can be found in the
T-374 EverFRESH Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the
manual from the Literature section, click on Options > EverFRESH.

2.5.18 TripWise
TripWise™ is a new premium option available for PrimeLINE units. TripWise is software logic that runs in the
background during every voyage and will let you know whenever a standard pre-trip inspection (PTI) is needed.
See Section 5.10 for more detail.

2.5.19 FuelWise
FuelWise™ is a power-saving option available for PrimeLINE units. FuelWise software works by dynamically
cycling the refrigeration system on and off to save energy while still maintaining temperature within +/- 0.25
degrees Celsius of setpoint on an hourly average.

T-372 2–4
 SECTION 3
DESCRIPTION

3.1 General Description

3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section
The unit is designed so that the majority of the components are accessible from the front (see Figure 3.1). The unit
model number, serial number and parts identification number can be found on the unit nameplate on the back wall
of the condenser section.

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section

1 2

3 3
4

16
7

15
8

14 13 12 11 10 9

1) Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent Panel. Located 8) Compressor

inside are: Evaporator Fan #2, Defrost Tempera- 9) Access Panel for Supply Temperature Sensor /
ture Sensor (DTS) Supply Recorder Sensor (STS / SRS)
2) Access Panel. Located inside are: Evaporator Fan 10) Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
#1, Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV), Heat Termi- 11) Economizer Heat Exchanger
nation Thermostat (HTT)
12) Options Label
3) Fork Lift Pockets
13) Unit Nameplate
4) Control Panel
14) Power Cables and Plug
5) Unit Display
15) Autotransformer location (if equipped)
6) Keypad
16) Condenser Fan
7) Start-Stop Switch (ST)
-----

3–1 T-372
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent
The function of the upper fresh air makeup vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air
circulation. A manually operated venting system is located in the upper left access panel.

3.1.3 Evaporator Section

The evaporator section is shown in Figure 3.2. The evaporator fans circulate air through the container by pulling it into
the top of the unit, directing it through the evaporator coil to be heated or cooled, and discharging it at the bottom.
Most evaporator components are accessible by removing the upper rear panel or by removing the evaporator fan
access panels.
Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section

4
10 1

15
3
14
13
12
11

1 8 7 4

1) Evaporator Fan #1 8) Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT)

2) Return Temperature Sensor (RTS), Return 9) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
Recorder Sensor (RRS) 10) Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 / ETS2)
3) Humidity Sensor (HS) location 11) Interrogator Connector Receptacle (ICR)
4) Evaporator Fan #2 12) USDA Probe Receptacle PR2
5) Evaporator Coil 13) USDA Probe Receptacle PR1
6) Evaporator Coil Heaters 14) USDA Probe Receptacle PR3
7) Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) 15) Cargo Probe Receptacle PR4
-----

T-372 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor Section
The compressor section (see Figure 3.3) includes the compressor, digital unloader valve (DUV), high pressure
switch, discharge pressure transducer (DPT), evaporator pressure transducer (EPT) and the suction pressure
transducer (SPT). The supply temperature sensor (STS) and supply recorder sensor (SRS) are located to the left
of the compressor.

Figure 3.3 Compressor Section

8
11
10
9

16
12

13
2 3 4

7
14
6
1

15

1) Compressor 9)
Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
2) Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 10)
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
(CPDS) location 11)
Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
3) Discharge Connection 12)
High Pressure Switch (HPS)
4) Suction Connection location 13)
Discharge Service Valve
5) Compressor Terminal Box 14)
Suction Service Valve
6) Oil Drain location 15)
Supply Temperature Sensor (STS), Supply
7) Economizer Connection Recorder Sensor (SRS)
8) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 16) Warning Label
-----

3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section

The air-cooled condenser section (see Figure 3.4) consists of the condenser fan, condenser coil, receiver, liquid
line service valve, filter drier, fusible plug, economizer, economizer expansion valve (EEV), economizer solenoid
valve (ESV), and sight glass / moisture indicator. The condenser fan pulls air from around the coil and discharges it
horizontally through the condenser fan grille.

3–3 T-372
 Figure 3.4 Air Cooled Condenser Section

2
1

9
8
10

11

12

14 13

1) Micro Channel Heat Exchanger (MCHE) Coil 8) Receiver Moisture & Liquid Indicator*
2) Grille and Venturi Assembly 9) Fusible Plug
3) Condenser Fan 10) Filter Drier
4) Condenser Coil Cover 11) Economizer
5) Condenser Fan Motor 12) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
6) Receiver 13) Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV)
7) Receiver Sight Glass* 14) Service Access Valve
-----
* Not visible in view, located behind Filter Drier.

T-372 3–4
3.1.6 Water-Cooled Condenser Section
The unit may contain a water-cooled condenser (WCC) installed as an option. When operating on the water-cooled
condenser, the condenser fan is deactivated by a water pressure switch or condenser fan switch.
Brazed Plate Water-Cooled Condenser
The brazed plate water-cooled condenser section (see Figure 3.5) consists of the brazed plate water-cooled
condenser, water couplings, a water pressure switch and a fusible plug. The receiver is retained in this
configuration and the brazed plate heat exchanger is placed between the air-cooled condenser and the receiver.

Figure 3.5 Brazed Plate Water-Cooled Condenser

3
2

1) Water-Cooled Condenser (WCC) 3) Self Draining Coupling (Water Out)

2) Coupling (Water In) 4) Water Pressure Switch (WP)
-----

3–5 T-372
3.1.7 Control Box Section
The control box (see Figure 3.6) includes: the manual operation switches, circuit breaker (CB-1), compressor, fan
and heater contactors, control power transformer, transformer AC line filter, fuses, keypad, display module, current
sensor module, and the controller module.

Figure 3.6 Control Box Section

1 2 3 4
14

13
8

12

9 6 7 10

11

1) Compressor Contactor (CH) 8) Current Sensor Module

2) Compressor Phase A Contactor (PA) 9) Circuit Breaker (CB1) 460V
3) Compressor Phase B Contactor (PB) 10) Control Transformer
4) Heater Contactor (HR) 11) Transformer AC Line Filter
5) Condenser Fan Contactor (CF) 12) Start-Stop Switch (ST)
6) Low Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor (ES) 13) Controller / DataCORDER Module
7) High Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor (EF) 14) Controller Battery Pack and Battery
-----

T-372 3–6
3.2 Refrigeration System Data

Table 3–1 Refrigeration System Data

Compressor / Motor Assembly Model Number ZMD26KVE-TFD-272
Weight (With Oil) 42.9 kg (95 lb)
Approved Oil Uniqema Emkarate RL-32-3MAF
Oil Charge 1774 ml (60 ounces)
Electronic Expansion Valve Verify at - 18°C (0°F) 4.4 to 6.7°C (8 to 12°F)
Superheat (Evaporator) container box temperature
Economizer Expansion Valve Verify at - 18°C (0°F) 4.4 to 11.1°C (8 to 20°F)
Superheat container box temperature
Heater Termination Opens 54° (+/- 3) C = 130° (+/- 5) F
Thermostat Closes 38° (+/- 4) C = 100° (+/- 7) F
High Pressure Switch Cut-Out 25 (+/- 1.0) kg/cm2 = 350 (+/- 10) psig
Cut-In 18 (+/- 0.7) kg/cm2 = 250 (+/- 10) psig

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge only with refrigerants R-134a or R-513A as specified
for the unit model number: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.
Refrigerant R-134a / R-513A Conforming to AHRI standard 700 specifications.

! CAUTION
Charge water-cooled condenser or receiver according to nameplate specifications to ensure
optimal unit performance.
Refrigerant Charge WCC Brazed Plate 4.58 kg (10.1 lbs)
Receiver 4.26 kg (9.4 lbs)
Fusible Plug Melting point 99°C = (210°F)
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft-lbs)
Unit Weight Refer to unit model number plate.
Water Pressure Switch Cut-In 0.5 +/- 0.2 kg/cm2 (7 +/- 3 psig)
Cut-Out 1.6 +/- 0.4 kg/cm2 (22 +/- 5 psig)

3.3 Electrical Data

Table 3–2 Electrical Data

Circuit Breaker CB-1 (25 amp) Trips at 29 amps
CB-2 (50 amp) Trips at 62.5 amps
CB-2 (70 amp) Trips at 87.5 amps
Compressor Motor Full Load Amps (FLA) 13 amps @ 460 VAC

3–7 T-372
 Table 3–2 Electrical Data (Continued)
Condenser Fan Motor Nominal Supply 380 VAC / 3 Phase / 50 Hz 460 VAC / 3 Phase / 60 Hz
Full Load Amps .71 amps .72 amps
Horsepower 0.21 hp 0.36 hp
Rotations Per Minute 1450 rpm 1750 rpm
Voltage and Frequency 360 - 460 VAC +/- 2.5 Hz 400 - 500 VAC +/- 2.5 Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required.
Rotation Counter-clockwise when viewed from shaft end.
Evaporator Coil Heaters Number of Heaters 6
Rating 750 watts +5/-10% each @ 230 VAC
Resistance (cold) 66.8 to 77.2 ohms @ 20°C (68°F)
Type Sheath
Evaporator Fan Motor(s) 380 VAC / 3 Phase / 50 Hz 460 VAC / 3 Phase / 60 Hz
Full Load Amps 1.07 .9
High Speed
Full Load Amps 0.47 0.47
Low Speed
Nominal Horsepower 0.36 0.63
High Speed
Nominal Horsepower 0.05 0.8
Low Speed
Rotations Per Minute 2850 rpm 3450 rpm
High Speed
Rotations Per Minute 1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Low Speed
Voltage and Frequency 360 - 460 VAC +/- 1.25 Hz 400 - 500 VAC +/- 1.5 Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end
Fuses Control Circuit 7.5 amps (F3, F4)
Controller / DataCORDER 7.5 amps (F1, F2)

Vent Positioning Sensor Electrical Output 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over 90 degree range
Supply Voltage 5 VDC +/- 10%
Supply Current 5 mA (typical)
Solenoid Valve Coils Nominal Resistance @ 7.7 ohms +/- 5%
(ESV) 24 VAC 77°F (25°C)
Maximum Current Draw 0.7 amps
DUV Coils 12 VDC Nominal Resistance @ 14.8 ohms +/- 5%
77°F (20°C)
Maximum Current Draw 929 mA
EEV Nominal Resistance Coil Feed to Ground 47 ohms
(Gray Wire)
Coil Feed to Coil Feed 95 ohms

T-372 3–8
 Table 3–2 Electrical Data (Continued)
Humidity Sensor Orange wire Power
Red wire Output
Brown wire Ground
Input voltage 5 VDC
Output voltage 0 to 3.3 VDC
Output voltage readings verses relative humidity (RH) percentage:
30% 0.99 V
50% 1.65 V
70% 2.31 V
90% 2.97 V
Controller Setpoint Range -35 to +30°C (-31 to +86°F)

3.4 Safety and Protective Devices

Unit components are protected from damage by safety and protective devices listed in Table 3–3. These devices
monitor the unit operating conditions and open a set of electrical contacts when an unsafe condition occurs.
Open safety switch contacts on either or both of devices IP-CP or HPS will shut down the compressor.
Open safety switch contacts on device IP-CM will shut down the condenser fan motor.
The entire refrigeration unit will shut down if one of the following safety devices open: (a) circuit breaker(s); (b) fuse
(F3 / F4, 7.5A); or (c) evaporator fan motor internal protector(s) - (IP).

Table 3–3 Safety and Protective Devices

Unsafe Condition Device Device Setting
Circuit Breaker (CB-1, 25 amp) - Manual Reset Trips at 29 amps (460 VAC)
Excessive current draw Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 50 amp) - Manual Reset Trips at 62.5 amps (230 VAC)
Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 70 amp) - Manual Reset Trips at 87.5 amps (230 VAC)
Excessive current draw in the Fuse (F3 / F4) 7.5 amp rating
control circuit
Excessive current draw by the Fuse (F1 / F2) 7.5 amp rating
controller
Excessive condenser fan motor Internal Protector (IP-CM) - Automatic Reset N/A
winding temperature
Excessive compressor motor Internal Protector - Automatic Reset N/A
winding temperature
Excessive evaporator fan mo- Internal Protector(s) (IP-EM) - Automatic Reset N/A
tor(s) winding temperature
Abnormal pressures / tempera- Fusible Plug - Used on the Receiver 99°C = (210°F)
tures in the high refrigerant side 35 kg/cm2 = (500 psig)
Abnormally high discharge High Pressure Switch (HPS) Opens at 25 kg/cm2
pressure (350 psig)

3–9 T-372
3.5 Refrigeration Circuit
3.5.1 Standard Operation
Starting at the compressor, (see Figure 3.7) the suction gas is compressed to a higher pressure and temperature.
The refrigerant gas flows through the discharge line and continues into the air-cooled condenser. When operating
with the air-cooled condenser active, air flowing across the coil fins and tubes cools the gas to saturation
temperature. By removing latent heat, the gas condenses to a high pressure/high temperature liquid and flows to
the receiver, which stores the additional charge necessary for low temperature operation.
When operating with the water-cooled condenser active (see Figure 3.9), the refrigerant gas passes through the
air-cooled condenser and enters the water-cooled condenser shell. The water flowing inside the tubing cools the
gas to saturation temperature in the same manner as the air passing over the air-cooled condenser. The refrigerant
condenses on the outside of the tubes and exits as a high temperature liquid. The water-cooled condenser also
acts as a receiver, storing refrigerant for low temperature operation.
The liquid refrigerant continues through the liquid line, the filter drier (which keeps refrigerant clean and dry) and
the economizer (not active during standard operation) to the electronic expansion valve (EEV).
As the liquid refrigerant passes through the variable orifice of the EEV, the pressure drops to suction pressure. In
this process some of the liquid vaporizes to a gas (flash gas), removing heat from the remaining liquid. The liquid
exits as a low pressure, low temperature, saturated mix. Heat is then absorbed from the return air by the balance of
the liquid, causing it to vaporize in the evaporator coil. The vapor then flows through the suction tube back to the
compressor.
On systems fitted with a water pressure switch, the condenser fan will be off when there is sufficient pressure to
open the switch. If water pressure drops below the switch cut out setting, the condenser fan will automatically start.
During the standard mode of operation, the normally closed digital unloader valve (DUV) controls the system
refrigerant flow and capacity by loading and unloading the compressor in frequent discrete time intervals. If the
system capacity has been decreased to the lowest allowable capacity with the DUV, the unit will enter a trim heat
mode of operation, during which the controller will pulse the evaporator heaters in sequence with the compressor
digital signal in order to absorb the excess capacity.

3.5.2 Economized Operation

In the economized mode, (see Figure 3.8) the frozen and pull down capacity of the unit is increased by sub-cooling
the liquid refrigerant entering the electronic expansion valve (EEV). Overall efficiency is increased because the gas
leaving the economizer enters the compressor at a higher pressure, therefore requiring less energy to compress it
to the required condensing conditions.
Liquid refrigerant for use in the economizer circuit is taken from the main liquid line as it leaves the filter drier. The
flow is activated when the controller energizes the economizer solenoid valve (ESV).
The liquid refrigerant flows through the ESV to the expansion valve internal passages, absorbing heat from the
liquid refrigerant flowing to the electronic expansion valve (EEV). The resultant “medium” temperature / pressure
gas enters the compressor at the economizer port fitting.
When the control air temperature falls to 2.0°C (3.6°F) above setpoint, the DUV unloads the compressor’s scroll
and begins to reduce the capacity of the unit. Percentage of the unit capacity is accessed through code select 01
(Cd01). For example, if Cd01 displays 70, it indicates that the compressor is operating unloaded with the DUV
engaged 30% of the time.

3.5.3 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)

The microprocessor controls the superheat leaving the evaporator via the electronic expansion valve (EEV), based
on inputs from the evaporator pressure transducer (EPT). The microprocessor transmits electronic pulses to the
EEV stepper motor, which opens or closes the valve orifice to maintain the superheat setpoint.

T-372 3–10
 Figure 3.7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Standard Operation

18

19

16
17
3

7
5
10 20
4 6

8 9

14
11
21
1
12
22
15

13
23

Discharge Liquid Saturated Suction

Vapor Mixture Vapor

1) Compressor 13) Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV)

2) Discharge Service Valve 14) Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV) Sensing Bulb
3) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 15) Economizer Connection
4) Condenser 16) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
5) Receiver 17) Evaporator
6) Receiver Sight Glass 18) Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)
7) Fusible Plug 19) Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS2)
8) Receiver Liquid Level / Moisture Indicator 20) Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
9) Liquid Line Service Valve 21) Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
10) Filter Drier 22) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
11) Economizer 23) Suction Service Valve
12) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
-----

3–11 T-372
 Figure 3.8 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Economized Operation

18

19

17 16

3
7
5
10 20
4 6

8 9

14
11
21

12 1

22
15
13
23

Discharge Liquid Saturated Suction

Vapor Mixture Vapor

1) Compressor 13) Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV)

2) Discharge Service Valve 14) Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV) Sensing Bulb
3) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 15) Economizer Connection
4) Condenser 16) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
5) Receiver 17) Evaporator
6) Receiver Sight Glass 18) Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)
7) Fusible Plug 19) Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS2)
8) Receiver Liquid Level / Moisture Indicator 20) Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
9) Liquid Line Service Valve 21) Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
10) Filter Drier 22) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
11) Economizer 23) Suction Service Valve
12) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
-----

T-372 3–12
 Figure 3.9 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Water-Cooled Condenser (Brazed Plate)

22

23

21 20
3
9 11

14
4 24

10 12 2
13

18
15 25
1
16

5
26
7 19
17
27

8
6

Discharge Liquid Saturated Suction

Vapor Mixture Vapor

1) Compressor 15) Economizer

2) Discharge Service Valve 16) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
3) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 17) Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV)
4) Condenser 18) Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV) Sensing Bulb
5) Water-Cooled Condenser 19) Economizer Connection
6) Coupling (Water In) 20) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
7) Water Pressure Switch 21) Evaporator
8) Coupling (Water Out) 22) Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)
9) Receiver 23) Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS2)
10) Receiver Sight Glass 24) Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
11) Fusible Plug 25) Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
12) Receiver Sight Glass / Moisture Indicator 26) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
13) Liquid Line Service Valve 27) Suction Service Valve
14) Filter Drier
-----

3–13 T-372
 SECTION 4
MICROPROCESSOR

4.1 Temperature Control Microprocessor System

The temperature control Micro-Link 5 microprocessor system consists of a control module (controller), display
module, keypad and interconnecting wiring. The controller houses the temperature control software and the Data-
CORDER software. The temperature control software functions to operate the unit components as required to pro-
vide the desired cargo temperature and humidity. The DataCORDER software functions to record unit operating
parameters and cargo temperature parameters for future retrieval. Coverage of the temperature control software
begins with Section 4.2. Coverage of the DataCORDER software is provided in Section 4.6.
4.1.1 Control Module
The control module (see Figure 4.1) is fitted with the Micro-Link 5 controller, power connectors, a micro USB port
and short range wireless connectivity.
Figure 4.1 Control Module

2 3 4 5

1) Micro-Link 5 Controller / DataCORDER Module 4) Device Power Connector

2) Controller Power Connector 5) Micro USB Port
3) Fuses (7.5A) 6) Mounting Screw
-----

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from circuit boards unless you are grounded to the unit frame
with a static safe wrist strap or equivalent static drain device.

! CAUTION
Remove the controller module and unplug all connectors before performing any arc welding
on any part of the container.

! CAUTION
When disconnecting connectors from the controller, press the latch tab prior to pulling out the
connector. Damage may occur if latch tab is not pressed in prior to removing the connector.

NOTE
Do not attempt to service the controller modules. Breaking the seal will void the warranty.

4.1.2 Display Module and Keypad

The display module and keypad are mounted on the control box door and serve to provide user access and read-
outs for both of the controller functions: temperature control and DataCORDER. The functions are accessed by
keypad selections and viewed on the display module.

4–1 T-372
The display module (see Figure 4.2) consists of two 5-digit displays and seven indicator lights. Descriptions of the
indicator lights are provided in Table 4–1. The keypad (see Figure 4.3) consists of eleven push button switches
that act as the user’s interface with the controller. Descriptions of the switch functions are provided in Table 4–2.

Figure 4.2 Display Module Figure 4.3 Keypad

CODE PRE
SELECT TRIP

MANUAL
ALARM
DEFROST/
LIST
INTERVAL

ENTER

RETURN C
SUPPLY F

BATTERY ALT
POWER MODE

Table 4–1 Display Module LEDs Table 4–2 Keypad Function

Light Function Key Function
COOL Energized when the refrigerant compres- CODE Access function codes.
(White / Blue) sor is energized. SELECT
HEAT Energized to indicate heater operation in PRE TRIP Display Pre-Trip selection menu.
(Orange) heat mode, defrost mode, or dehumidifica- Discontinue pre-trip in progress.
tion.
ALARM LIST Display alarm list and clear alarm queue.
DEFROST Energized when the unit is in defrost mode.
MANUAL Display selected defrost mode. Press and
(Orange)
DEFROST / hold this key for five seconds to initiate de-
IN RANGE Energized when the controlled tempera- INTERVAL frost using same logic as if the optional man-
(Green) ture probe is within specified tolerance of ual defrost switch was toggled on.
setpoint. The controlling probe in perish-
ENTER Confirm a selection or save a selection to the
able range is the SUPPLY air probe and in
controller.
frozen range is the RETURN air probe.
Arrow Up Change or scroll a selection up. Pre-trip ad-
ALARM Energized when an active or inactive shut-
vance or test interrupt.
(Red) down alarm is in the alarm queue.
Arrow Down Change or scroll selection down. Pre-trip re-
SUPPLY Energized when the supply air probe is
peat backward.
(Yellow) used for control. When this LED is illumi-
nated, the temperature displayed in the RETURN / Display non-controlling probe temperature
AIR TEMPERATURE display is the read- SUPPLY (momentary display).
ing at the supply air probe. This LED will °C / °F Display alternate english / metric scale (mo-
flash if dehumidification or humidification is mentary display). When set to F, pressure is
enabled. displayed in psig and vacuum in “/hg.” “P” ap-
RETURN Energized when the return air probe is pears after the value to indicate psig and “i”
(Yellow) used for control. When this LED is illumi- appears for inches of mercury. When set to
nated, the temperature displayed in the C, pressure readings are in bars. “b” appears
AIR TEMPERATURE display is the read- after the value to indicate bars.
ing at the return air probe. BATTERY Initiate battery backup mode to allow set-
POWER point & function code selection if AC power is
not connected.
ALT MODE Access DataCORDER configuration vari-
ables, function codes and stored tempera-
tures. Access a USB software loading menu
and a wireless setup menu.

T-372 4–2
4.2 Controller Software
The controller software is a custom designed program that is subdivided into configuration software and opera-
tional software. The controller software performs the following functions:
• Control supply or return air temperature to required limits, provide modulated refrigeration operation, econo-
mized operation, unloaded operation, electric heat control, and defrost. Defrost is performed to clear buildup
of frost and ice to ensure proper air flow across the evaporator coil.
• Provide default independent readouts of setpoint and supply or return air temperatures.
• Provide ability to read and (if applicable) modify the configuration software variables, operating software
function codes and alarm code indications.
• Provide a pre-trip step-by-step checkout of refrigeration unit performance including: proper component oper-
ation, electronic and refrigeration control operation, heater operation, probe calibration, pressure limiting and
current limiting settings.
• Provide battery-powered ability to access or change selected codes and setpoint without AC power con-
nected. This is only if the carrier-provided rechargeable battery option is installed.

4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables)

Configuration software is a variable listing of the components available for use by the operational software. This
software is factory installed in accordance with the equipment fitted and options listed on the original purchase
order. Changes to the configuration software are required only when a new controller has been installed or a phys-
ical change has been made to the unit such as the addition or removal of an option. A configuration variable list is
provided in Table 4–7. Change to the factory-installed configuration software can be achieved via the controller
micro USB port.

4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes)

Operational software is the actual operation programming of the controller which activates or deactivates compo-
nents in accordance with current unit operating conditions and selected modes of operation. The programming is
divided into function codes. Some of the codes are read only, while the remaining codes may be user configured.
The value of the user configurable codes can be assigned in accordance with user desired mode of operation. A
list of the function codes is provided in Table 4–8.

4.2.2.a Accessing Function Codes on the Display

1. Press the CODE SELECT key on the keypad.
2. Press an Arrow key until the left window displays the desired function code.
3. The right window will display the selected function code value for five seconds before returning to normal
display mode.
4. If additional time is required, press the ENTER key to extend the display time to 30 seconds.

4.3 Modes of Operation

General operation sequences for cooling, heating and defrost are provided in the following sub-sections. Sche-
matic representation of controller operation is provided in Figure 4.5, Figure 4.6 & Figure 4.7.
Operational software responds to various inputs. These inputs come from the temperature sensors and pressure
transducers, the temperature setpoint, the settings of the configuration variables and the function code assignments.
The action taken by the operational software changes as the input values change. Overall interaction of the inputs is
described as a “mode” of operation. The modes of operation include perishable (chill) mode and frozen mode. Descrip-
tions of the controller interaction and modes of operation are provided in the following sub-sections.

4.3.1 Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence

At start up, the controller logic checks for proper phase sequencing and compressor rotation. If incorrect sequenc-
ing is causing the compressor and three-phase evaporator fan motors to rotate in the wrong direction, the controller
will energize or de-energize relay TCP as required. Relay TCP will switch its contacts, energizing or de-energizing
relays PA and PB. Relay PA is wired to energize the circuits on L1, L2 and L3. Relay PB is wired to energize the cir-
cuits on L3, L2, and L1, thus providing reverse rotation.

4–3 T-372
4.3.2 Start Up - Compressor Bump Start
At start up, the controller logic will initiate a compressor bump start procedure to clear liquid refrigerant from the
compressor. If suction and discharge pressures have equalized, the compressor will perform three compressor
bump starts. A compressor bump start may also occur after a defrost cycle has been completed.
During bump start, the electronic expansion valve (EEV) will close. Relays TS, TN, TE, and TV will be de-ener-
gized (opened). The result of this action will close the economizer solenoid valve (ESV) and shut all fans off. The
compressor will start for 1 second, then pause for five seconds. This sequence will be repeated two more times.
After the final bump start, the unit will pre-position the EEV to the correct starting position, pause and then start up.

4.3.3 Perishable Mode (Temperature Control)

In Perishable Mode, the controller maintains the supply air temperature at setpoint, the SUPPLY indicator light is
illuminated and the default reading on the display window is the supply temperature sensor reading.
When the supply air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.
When variable CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, Perishable mode is active with setpoints above
-10°C (+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, Perishable mode is active with setpoints above -5°C (+23°F).

4.3.4 Perishable Pulldown Mode

In Perishable Pulldown Mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to setpoint. When cooling
from a temperature that is more than 2.5°C (4.5°F) above setpoint, the system will be in Perishable Pulldown mode
in economized operation. However, pressure and current limit functions may restrict the valve if either exceeds the
preset value.

4.3.5 Perishable Steady State Mode

In Perishable Steady State Mode, the control temperature is maintained near a setpoint that is above the Heat
Lockout Temperature. Once setpoint is reached, the unit will transition to Perishable Steady State Mode. This
results in unloaded operation by cycling the digital unloader valve (DUV) to limit capacity and maintain steady tem-
perature control.
The unit is capable of maintaining supply air temperature to within +/- 0.2°C (+/- 0.36°F) of setpoint. Supply air tem-
perature is controlled by positioning of the electronic expansion valve (EEV), cycling of the DUV, cycling of the
compressor, and cycling of the heaters.

4.3.6 Perishable Idle Mode (Air Circulation)

When it is unnecessary to run the compressor to maintain control temperature, the system enters Perishable Idle
Mode. If the controller has determined that cooling is not required or the controller logic determines suction pres-
sure is at the low pressure limit, the unit will transition to Perishable Idle Mode. In this mode, the compressor is
turned off, but the evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout the container. If temperature rises
+0.2°C (0.4°F) above setpoint, the unit will transition back to Perishable Steady State Mode.

4.3.7 Perishable Heating Mode

When it is necessary to raise the control temperature, the system will enter Perishable Heating Mode. If the tem-
perature drops to 0.5°C (0.9°F) below setpoint, the unit will transition to Perishable Heating Mode, and the heaters
will be energized. The unit will transition back to Perishable Idle Mode when the temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.4°F)
below the setpoint, and the heaters will de-energize.

T-372 4–4
 Figure 4.4 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode

Perishable Mode Pull Down

(Only Applicable to Perishable Mode)
Controller Set Point ABOVE -10qC (+14qF), Controller Set Point ABOVE -10qC (+14qF),
or -5qC (+23qF) optionally or -5qC (+23qF) optionally


+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)
Cooling, Cooling,
Unloaded Enconomized

Set +0.20qC
Point Set
Cooling, Point
-0.20qC Air Circulation -0.25qC Unloaded
-0.20qC -0.20qC

-0.50qC AirCirculation
Air Circulation
-0.50qC

Heating
Heating

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

4.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification

Perishable Dehumidification is provided to reduce the humidity levels inside the container. The dehumidification
setpoint range is from 50% to 95%. Dehumidification is activated when a humidity value is set at Cd33. The yellow
SUPPLY LED will flash ON and OFF every second to indicate that Dehumidification is active. Once Dehumidifica-
tion is active, the controller will activate the heat relay to begin Dehumidification as long as the following conditions
are satisfied:
1. The humidity sensor reading is above the humidity setpoint (Cd33).
2. The unit is in Perishable Steady State Mode and supply air temperature is less than 0.25°C (0.45°F) above
setpoint.
3. The heater debounce timer (three minutes) has timed out.
4. The heater termination thermostat (HTT) is closed.

If the above conditions are true for at least one hour, the evaporator fans will switch from high speed to low speed.
Evaporator fan speed will then switch every hour, as long as the four conditions are met (see Bulb mode, Section
4.3.9 for different evaporator fan speed options).
If any condition except item (1) becomes false OR if the relative humidity sensed is 2% below the dehumidification
setpoint, the high speed evaporator fans will be energized.
During dehumidification, power is applied to the defrost heaters. This added heat load causes the controller to
open the electronic expansion valve (EEV) to match the increased heat load while still holding the supply air tem-
perature very close to the setpoint. Opening the EEV reduces the temperature of the evaporator coil surface, which
increases the rate at which water is condensed and removes water from the passing air. Removing water from the
air reduces the relative humidity. When the relative humidity sensed is 2% below setpoint, the controller de-ener-
gizes the heat relay. The controller will continue to cycle heating to maintain relative humidity below the selected
setpoint. If dehumidification is terminated by a condition other than the humidity sensor, e.g., an out-of-range or
compressor shutdown condition, the heat relay is de-energized immediately.

4–5 T-372
Two timers are activated during dehumidification to prevent rapid cycling and consequent contactor wear:
1. Heater debounce timer (three minutes) - The heater debounce timer is started whenever the heater contac-
tor status is changed. The heater contactor remains energized (or de-energized) for at least three minutes
even if the setpoint criteria are satisfied.
2. Out-of-range timer (five minutes) - The out-of-range timer is started to maintain heater operation during a
temporary out-of-range condition. If supply air temperature remains outside of the user selected in-range
setting for more than five minutes, the heaters will be de-energized to allow the system to recover. The out-
of-range timer starts as soon as temperature exceeds in-range tolerance value set by Cd30.

4.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode

Bulb Mode is an extension of dehumidification which allows changes to the evaporator fan speed and/or defrost
termination setpoints.
Bulb Mode is active when Cd35 is set to “Bulb.” Once Bulb Mode is activated, the user may then change dehumid-
ification evaporator fan operation from the default (speed alternates from low to high each hour) to constant low or
constant high speed. This is done by toggling Cd36 from its default of “alt” to “Lo” or “Hi” as desired. If low speed
evaporator fan operation is selected, this gives the user the additional capability of selecting dehumidification set-
points from 50 to 95%.
In addition, if Bulb Mode is active, Cd37 may be set to override the previous defrost termination thermostat (DTT)
settings. The temperature at which the DTT will be considered “open” may be changed [in 0.1°C (0.2°F) incre-
ments] to any value between 25.6°C (78°F) and 4°C (39.2°F). The temperature at which the DTT is considered
closed for interval timer start or demand defrost is 10°C (50°F) for “open” values from 25.6°C (78°F) down to a
10°C (50°F) setting. For “open” values lower than 10°C, the “closed” values will decrease to the same value as the
“open” setting.
Bulb Mode is terminated when:
• Bulb Mode function code Cd35 is set to “Nor.”
• Dehumidification function code Cd33 is set to “Off.”
• The user changes the setpoint to one that is in the frozen range.
When Bulb Mode is disabled by any of the above conditions, evaporator fan operation for dehumidification reverts
to “alt” and the DTS termination setting resets to the value determined by CnF41.

4.3.10 Perishable Economy Fan Mode

Economy Fan Mode is an extension of Perishable Mode, and is provided for power saving purposes. Economy Fan
Mode is activated when Cd34 (also used for Frozen Economy Mode) is set to “ON.” Economy Fan Mode is used in
the transportation of temperature-tolerant cargo or non-respiration items which do not require high airflow for
removing respiration heat.
There is no active display that indicates that Economy Fan Mode has been initiated. To check for Economy Fan
Mode, perform a manual display of Cd34.
In order to initiate Economy Fan Mode, a perishable setpoint must be selected prior to activation. When Economy
Fan Mode is active, the evaporator fans will be controlled as follows:

a. At the start of each cooling or heating cycle, the evaporator fans will run in high speed for three minutes.

b. The fans are then switched to low speed any time the supply air temperature is within +/- 0.2°C (0.36°F) of
the setpoint and the return air temperature is less than or equal to the supply air temperature + 3°C (5.4°F).

c. The fans will continue to run in low speed for one hour.

d. At the end of the hour, the fans will switch back to high speed and the cycle will be repeated. If Bulb Mode is
active, Economy Fan Mode will be overridden.

T-372 4–6
4.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

NOTE
In Standard Perishable Mode, the evaporator motors run in high speed. In Economy Fan Mode, the
fan speed is varied.

a. When supply air temperature is above setpoint and decreasing, the unit will cool with the condenser fan
motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), and evaporator fan motors (EF) energized, and the white COOL light
illuminated. (See Figure 4.5). Also, if current or pressure limiting is not active, the controller will close con-
tacts TS to open the economizer solenoid valve (ESV) and place the unit in economized operation.

Figure 4.5 Perishable Mode Cooling

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC CH

IP-CM TN CF

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

b. When supply air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above setpoint (Cd30), the green IN
RANGE light is illuminated.
c. As air temperature continues to fall, unloaded cooling starts (DUV pulses opens) as the supply air tempera-
ture approaches setpoint. (See Figure 4.4).
d. When unloaded cooling starts, EEV control will transition from a full cool superheat setpoint to a lower mod-
ulated cool superheat setpoint. Once unloading starts, the EEV controls evaporator superheat based on the
system duty cycle where instantaneous superheat will vary.
e. When the supply air temperature has fallen to within 1.9°C (3.4°F) of setpoint temperature and the average
capacity of the system has fallen below 70%, the unit will open contacts TS to close the ESV and take the
unit out of economized operation.
f. The controller continuously monitors supply air temperature. Once the supply air temperature falls below
setpoint, the controller periodically records supply air temperature, setpoint and time. A calculation is then
performed to determine temperature drift from setpoint over time. If the calculation determines that cooling
is no longer required, contacts TC and TN are opened to de-energize the compressor motor and the con-
denser fan motor. In addition the controller will close the EEV.
g. The evaporator fan motors continue to run to circulate air throughout the container. The green IN RANGE
light remains illuminated as long as the supply air temperature is within tolerance of the setpoint.
h. If the supply air temperature increases to 1.0°C (1.8°F) above setpoint and three minutes have elapsed,
contacts TC and TN close to restart the compressor and condenser fan motors in standard mode (non-
economized) operation. The white COOL light is also illuminated.
i. If the average system capacity has risen to 100% during unloaded cooling and three minutes off time has
elapsed, relay TS will energize to open the ESV, placing the unit in economized mode.
j. If the supply air increases more than 2.5°C (4.5°F) above setpoint temperature, the microprocessor will transi-
tion the evaporator superheat control from modulation back to full cool control.

4–7 T-372
4.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation
a. If the supply air temperature decreases 0.5°C (0.9°F) below setpoint, the system enters the Heating Mode
(see Figure 4.4). The controller closes contacts TH (see Figure 4.6) to allow power flow through the heat
termination thermostat (HTT) to energize the heaters (HR). The orange HEAT light is also illuminated. The
evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout the container.
b. When the supply air temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.4°F) below setpoint, contact TH opens to de-energize the
heaters. The orange HEAT light is also de-energized. The evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air
throughout the container.
c. The safety HTT is attached to an evaporator coil circuit and will open the heating circuit if overheating
occurs.

Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Heating

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC CH

IP-CM TN CF

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

NOTE
The electronic expansion valve (EEV) and digital unloader valve (DUV) are independently operated by
the microprocessor. For full diagrams and legend, see Section 8.

4.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat

If the system capacity has been decreased to the lowest allowable capacity and conditions exist that warrant max-
imum temperature stability, the controller will pulse the HR relay to energize the evaporator heaters in sequence
with the compressor digital signal.

4.3.14 Frozen Mode (Temperature Control)

In Frozen Mode, the controller maintains the return air temperature at setpoint, the yellow RETURN indicator light is
illuminated, and the default reading on the display window is the return temperature sensor (RTS) reading.
When the return air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.
When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, Frozen Mode is active with setpoints below -10°C
(+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, Frozen Mode is active with setpoints below -5°C (+23°F).
When the system is in Frozen Mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to setpoint. The
system will remain in economized operation.

4.3.15 Frozen Steady State Mode

Frozen cargos are not sensitive to minor temperature changes, and the frozen temperature control system takes
advantage of this to greatly improve the energy efficiency of the unit. Frozen range temperature control is accom-
plished by cycling the compressor on and off as the load demand requires. Once the frozen setpoint is reached, the
unit will transition to Frozen Steady State Mode (economized operation).

T-372 4–8
4.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode
When temperature drops to setpoint minus 0.2°C (0.4°F) and the compressor has run for at least five minutes, the
unit will transition to the Frozen Idle Mode. The compressor is turned off and the evaporator fans continue to run to
circulate air throughout the container. If temperature rises above setpoint +0.2°C (0.4°F), the unit will transition back
to the Frozen Steady State Mode.

Figure 4.7 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode

Frozen Mode
Controller Set Point at or BELOW ï10qC (+14qF),
or ï5qC (+23qF) optionally
+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)

Cooling,
Economized

+.20qC
Set Point
ï.20qC

Air Circulation

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

4.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode

If the temperature drops 10°C (18°F) below setpoint, the unit will transition to the Frozen “Heat” Mode. The evapo-
rator fans are brought to high speed, and the heat from the fans is circulated through the container. The unit will
transition back to Frozen Steady State Mode when the temperature rises back to the transition point.

4.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode

In order to activate Frozen Economy Mode, a frozen setpoint temperature must be selected, and Cd34 (Economy
Mode) is set to “ON.” When this mode is active, the system will perform normal Frozen Mode operations except
that the entire refrigeration system, excluding the controller, will be turned off when the control temperature is less
than or equal to the setpoint -2°C (4°F).
After an off-cycle period of 60 minutes, the unit will turn on the high speed evaporator fans for three minutes, and
then check the control temperature. If the control temperature is greater than or equal to the frozen setpoint +0.2°C
(0.4°F), the unit will restart the refrigeration system and continue to cool until the off-cycle temperature criteria are
met. If the control temperature is less than the frozen setpoint +0.2°C (0.4°F) the unit will turn off the evaporator
fans and restart another 60 minute off-cycle.

4.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

a. When the return air temperature is above setpoint and decreasing, the unit will transition to economized
cooling with the condenser fan motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), economizer solenoid valve (ESV), low
speed evaporator fan motors (ES) energized and the white COOL light illuminated. (See Figure 4.8).
b. When the return air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above setpoint, the green IN
RANGE light is illuminated.

4–9 T-372
 c. When the return air temperature decreases to 0.2°C (0.4°F) below setpoint, contacts TC, TS and TN are
opened to de-energize the compressor, economizer solenoid valve and condenser fan motor. The white
COOL light is also de-energized. The electronic expansion valve (EEV) will close.
d. The evaporator fan motors continue to run in low speed to circulate air throughout the container. The green
IN RANGE light remains illuminated as long as the return air is within tolerance of setpoint.
e. If return air temperature drops to 10°C (18°F) or more below setpoint, the evaporator fans switch to high speed.
f. When the return air temperature increases to 0.2°C (0.4°F) above setpoint and three minutes have elapsed,
the EEV opens and contacts TC, TS and TN close to restart the compressor, open the ESV and restart the
condenser fan motor. The white COOL light is illuminated.
Figure 4.8 Frozen Mode
ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC CH

IP-CM TN CF

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

NOTE
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. Complete schematics and leg-
ends are located in Section 8.

4.3.20 Defrost
Defrost is initiated to remove ice buildup from the evaporator coil which can obstruct air flow and reduce the cooling
capacity of the unit. The defrost cycle may consist of up to three distinct operations depending upon the reason for
the defrost or model number configuration. The first is de-icing of the coil, the second is defrost due to a probe
check cycle and the third is a snap freeze process based on the unit model configuration.
• De-icing the coil consists of removing power to the cooling components (compressor, evaporator fans, and con-
denser fan), closing the EEV, and turning on the heaters, which are located below the evaporator coil. During
normal operation, de-icing will continue until temperatures indicate that the ice on the coil has been removed,
proper air flow has been restored, and the unit is ready to control temperature efficiently.
• If defrost was initiated by the probe check logic, then the Probe Check is carried out after the completion of the
defrost cycle. A Probe Check is initiated only when there is an inaccuracy between the controller temperature
sensors.
• Snap Freeze allows the system to cool for a period of time after de-icing, with the evaporator fans turned off and
is only carried out if configured by model number. Snap-Freeze allows for the removal of latent de-icing heat
from the evaporator coils, and freezes any remaining moisture that might otherwise be blown into the container.
For more information on Probe Diagnostics refer to Section 5.9

4.3.21 Defrost Operation

Initiation of defrost is dependent on the state of the defrost temperature sensor (DTS). When the DTS senses a
temperature less than 10°C (50°F), the defrost options become active and the timer is engaged for the initiation of
the defrost cycle. The defrost time accumulates when the compressor is running. In the perishable mode this is the
same as real time as the compressor in general runs continuously. In frozen mode the actual time necessary to
count down to the next defrost will exceed the defrost interval depending on the compressor duty-cycle.

T-372 4–10
When the defrost mode is in the active state, defrost can be initiated when any one of the following additional con-
ditions become true:
1. Manually: While in the Defrost screen, when the Manual Defrost soft key is selected, if conditions will allow
for a defrost, a manual defrost is initiated. The Defrost Indicator light is lit, and the user is brought back to
the Main / Default screen. If conditions are NOT allowing for a defrost, a pop up message screen appears.
2. Timer: The Defrost Interval Timer reaches the user selectable Interval. The user-selected intervals are 3, 6,
9, 12, 24 Hours, Off, AUTO, or AUTO2; factory default is AUTO. Refer to Defrost Interval setting on the Trip
Settings screen.
a. Automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost at three hours and then adjusts the interval to the next
defrost based on the accumulation of ice on the evaporator coil. Following a start-up or after termination
of defrost, the time will not begin counting down until the DTS reading falls below 10°C (50°F). If the
reading of DTS rises above termination setting any time during the timer count down, the interval is reset
and the countdown starts over. The Auto defrost time is reset to three hours start time after every PTI ini-
tiation or trip start interval.
b. After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used until the next defrost ter-
mination, the next time the DTS contacts are OPEN, or the next time power to the control is interrupted.
If the previous value or the new value is “OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
3. Probe Check: If defrost is initiated due to Probe Check immediately following the defrost cycle the evapora-
tion fans are started and run for eight minutes to stabilize the temperature throughout the container. A probe
check comparison is carried out at the end of the eight minute period if any sensor is found out of calibration.
At this time its alarm set is no longer used for control/reorder purposes.
4. Probe Check Logic: The logic determines that a Probe Check is necessary based on temperature values
currently reported by the supply and return probes
5. Delta T Logic: If the difference between return and supply air temperature (Delta T) becomes too great indi-
cating possible reduced airflow over the evaporator coil caused by ice buildup requiring a defrost.
a. In Perishable Pull Down - Delta T increases to greater than 12°C, and 90 minutes of compressor run
time have been recorded.
b. In Perishable Steady State - A baseline Delta T is recorded following the first defrost cycle after steady
state conditions are reached, (the unit is cooling, and the evaporator fans and heaters must remain in a
stable state for a period of five minutes). Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 4°C
above the baseline, and 90 minutes of compressor run time have been recorded.
c. In Frozen Mode - Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 16°C and 90 minutes of
compressor run time have been recorded.
When defrost is initiated, the controller closes the EEV, opens contacts TC, TN and TE (or TV) to de-energize the
compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fans. The controller then closes contacts TH to supply power to the
heaters. The orange DEFROST light and HEAT light are illuminated and the COOL light is also de-energized.
Figure 4.9 Defrost

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC PB

IP-CM TN CF

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

4–11 T-372
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. Complete schematics and legends are
located in Section 8.
Defrost will terminate when the DTS reading rises above one of two model number configurable options selection,
either an upper setting of 25.6°C (78°F) which is default or lower setting of 18°C (64°F). When the DTS reading
rises to the configured setting, the de-icing operation is terminated.

4.3.22 Defrost Related Settings

DTS Failure
When the return air temperature falls to 7°C (45°F), the controller ensures that the defrost temperature sensor
(DTS) reading has dropped to 10°C or below. If it has not, it indicates a failed DTS. A DTS failure alarm is triggered
and the defrost mode is operated by the return temperature sensor (RTS). Defrost will terminate after 1 hour. If the
DTS fails to reach is termination setting, the defrost terminate after 2 hours of operation.

Defrost Timer
If CnF23 is configured to “SAv” (save), then the value of the defrost interval timer will be saved at power down and
restored at power up. This option prevents short power interruptions from resetting an almost expired defrost inter-
val, and possibly delaying a needed defrost cycle. If the save option is not selected the defrost timer will re-initiate
and begin recounting.
If CnF11 is model number configured to OFF the operator may choose “OFF” as a defrost interval option.
If defrost does not terminate correctly and temperature reaches the set point of the Heat Termination Thermostat
(HTT) 54°C (130°F), the HTT will open to de-energize the heaters (AL259 & AL260). If the HTT does not open and
termination does not occur within two hours, the controller will terminate defrost. AL260 will be activated to inform
of a possible DTS failure.

4.3.23 Protection Mode - Evaporator Fan Operation

Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will shut down the unit.

4.3.24 Protection Mode - Failure Action

Function code Cd29 may be operator set to select the action the controller will take upon a system failure. The fac-
tory default is full system shutdown. See Table 4–8.

4.3.25 Protection Mode - Generator Protection

Function codes Cd31 (Stagger Start, Offset Time) and Cd32 (Current Limit) may be operator set to control the start
up sequence of multiple units and operating current draw. The factory default allows on demand starting (no delay)
of units and normal current draw. See Table 4–8.

4.3.26 Protection Mode - Compressor High Temperature Protection

The controller continuously monitors compressor discharge pressure and temperature, and suction pressure. If
discharge pressure or temperature rises above the allowed limit or suction pressure falls below the allowed limit,
the compressor will be cycled off and on every 3 minutes. Condenser and evaporator fans will continue to operate
during the compressor off cycle.
If high compressor dome temperature occurs, as measured by the CPDS, the controller will allow additional refrig-
erant to be released into the system in order to provide cooling to the evaporator coil and compressor dome. The
controller is alerted to high compressor dome temperatures via the CPDS when ambient temperature is greater
than 43.3°C (110°F), return air temperature is less than -17.5°C (0.5°F) and the compressor discharge temperature
is greater than 117.7°C (244°F). Dome temperature control logic will disengage when return air temperature and
ambient temperature return to allowed limits or when the compressor turns off.

4.3.27 Protection Mode - Compressor Low Pressure Protection

If the suction pressure low limit is triggered, the DUV will energize to raise the suction pressure.

4.3.28 Protection Mode - Perishable Mode System Pressure Regulation

In Perishable Mode, system pressures may need to be regulated at ambient temperatures of 20°C (68°F) and
below. Once below this ambient temperature, the condenser fan may cycle on and off based on limits imposed for
discharge pressure. For extremely cold ambient temperatures, -18°C (0°F), heater cycling may occur within normal
system operation based on discharge pressure limits.

T-372 4–12
4.3.29 Protection Mode - Condenser Fan Override
When CnF17 (Discharge Temperature Sensor) is set to “In” and CnF48 (Condenser Fan Switch Override) is set to
“On”, the condenser fan switch override logic is activated. If condenser cooling water pressure is sufficient to open
the water pressure switch (de-energizing the condenser fan) when water flow or pressure conditions are not main-
taining discharge temperature, the logic will energize the condenser fan as follows:
1. If the DUV is less than 80% open when the controller calls for it to be100% open, the condenser fan is ener-
gized. When the DUV is 100% open, the fan will de-energize.
2. If DPT reading is invalid or out of range (AL65), the condenser fan is energized and will remain energized
until system power is cycled.
3. If the system is running on condenser fan override and the high pressure switch opens, the condenser fan is
energized and will remain energized until the system power is cycled.

4.3.30 Quest
Quest (Quality and Energy Efficiency in Storage and Transport) power saving mode helps shipping lines lower their
operating costs by decreasing the system’s run time, energy usage and emissions. Quest is a method of tempera-
ture control used during steady-state perishable cooling that cycles the compressor on and off according to supply
/ return air temperature conditions.
To be eligible for steady-state control, the unit must first complete a setpoint pulldown phase and a CCPC pulldown
phase:
• During setpoint pulldown, supply air temperature is controlled according to the unit’s nominal supply air setpoint.
• During CCPC pulldown, supply air temperature is lowered somewhat relative to the nominal setpoint. Evap-
orator fans are forced to operate at high speed.
Steady-state CCPC control maintains the same lowered supply air temperature that was used during CCPC pull-
down. The compressor cycles on and off according to return air high and low limits. Depending on the fan mode of
operation selected, the evaporator fans may be programmed to run at low speed some or all of the time according
to the control logic.

4.4 Controller Alarms

Alarm display is an independent controller software function. If an operating parameter is outside of expected
range or a component does not return the correct signals back to the controller, an alarm is generated. A listing of
alarms is provided in Section 4.10.
The alarm philosophy balances the protection of the refrigeration unit and that of the refrigerated cargo. The action
taken when an error is detected always considers the survival of the cargo. Rechecks are made to confirm that an
error actually exists.
Some alarms requiring compressor shutdown have time delays before and after to try to keep the compressor on
line. An example is alarm code “LO,” (low main voltage), when a voltage drop of over 25% occurs, an indication is
given on the display, but the unit will continue to run.
When an Alarm Occurs:
• The red ALARM light illuminates for alarm code numbers 003, 017, 020, 021, 022, 023, 024, 025, 026, 027,
028 and 072.
• If a detectable problem exists, its alarm code will be alternately displayed with the setpoint on the left display.
• The user should scroll through the alarm list to determine what alarms exist or have existed. Alarms must be
diagnosed and corrected before the alarm list can be cleared.
To Display Alarm Codes:
1. While in the default display mode, press the ALARM LIST key. This accesses the alarm list display mode,
which displays any alarms archived in the alarm queue.The alarm queue stores up to 64 alarms in the
sequence in which they occurred.
2. The user may scroll through the list by pressing an Arrow key. The left display will show “AL###,” where ##
is the alarm number sequentially in the queue. The right display will show the actual alarm code. “AA###”
will display for an active alarm, where “###” is the alarm code. Or “IA###” will display for an inactive alarm,
see Section 4.10.
3. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active.

4–13 T-372
 4. “CLEAr” is displayed if all alarms are inactive. Press the ENTER key to clear the alarm queue. The alarm list
will clear and “-----” will be displayed.

NOTICE
AL026 is active when none of the sensors are responding. Check the ME connector on the front of
the controller. If it is loose or unplugged, reconnect it, then run a Pre-trip test (P5) to clear AL026.

Figure 4.10 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence

Start
Troubleshooting

Unit does No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER

self test? Supply Section 5.2

Yes

Did
Evaporator No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER
fans start? Supply Section 5.2

Yes

Correct No Install Latest Refer to CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

software Software
version? Revision Section 4.2

Yes

Unit Load correct

configured No Refer to Configuration Software (Variables)
unit
correctly? configuration Section 4.2.1

Yes

See alarm
Active Yes details & Refer to Controller Alarm Indications
Alarms? repair Section 4.4

No

Pass No Refer to Pre-trip Diagnostics

Pre-trip Correct
inspection? all faults Section 4.5

Yes

Operating No Correct Refer to REFRIGERATION SERVICE

pressures Refrigerant Section 7.3
normal? issue

Yes

Unit OK

T-372 4–14
4.5 Pre-Trip Diagnostics
Pre-Trip Diagnostics is an independent controller function that suspends normal refrigeration controller activities
and provides preprogrammed test routines. The test routine can be run in Auto Mode, which automatically per-
forms a preprogrammed sequence of tests, or Manual Mode, which allows the operator to select and run any of the
individual tests.

! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When the PRE TRIP key is pressed, Economy, Dehumidification and Bulb Mode will be deacti-
vated. At the completion of the pre-trip test, Economy, Dehumidification and Bulb Mode must be
reactivated.
A pre-trip test may be initiated by use of the keypad or via communication, but when initiated by communication the
controller will execute the entire battery of tests (Auto Mode).
At the end of a pre-trip test, the message “P,” “rSLts” (pretest results) will be displayed. Press the ENTER key to
allow the user to see the results for each of the sub-tests. The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for each
test run to completion.
A detailed description of the pre-trip tests and test codes is provided in Table 4–9. Detailed operating instructions
are provided in Section 5.8.

4.6 DataCORDER
4.6.1 Description
Carrier Transicold “DataCORDER” software is integrated into the controller and serves to eliminate the tempera-
ture recorder and paper chart. DataCORDER Software is subdivided into operational software, configuration soft-
ware, and data memory. DataCORDER functions may be accessed by keypad selections and viewed on the
display module.
For a description of DataCORDER communications, refer to Section 4.6.15.
The DataCORDER consists of:
• Configuration software
• Operational software
• Data storage memory
• Real time clock (with internal battery backup)
• Six thermistor inputs
• Interrogation connections
• Power supply (battery pack)

The DataCORDER performs the following functions:

• Logs configured sensor data at the configured time interval.
• Records alarm activity.
• Records PTI results.
• Records modifications to the controller (i.e. configuration, time, software upgrade, etc).
• Records operational events (i.e. defrost, dehumidification, setpoint change, power On/Off, cooling mode, etc).
• Records optional events (i.e. USDA activity, trip start, probe calibration, GDP calibration, XtendFresh opera-
tion, vent position sensor location, etc).

4–15 T-372
4.6.2 DataCORDER Operational Software
The operational software reads and interprets inputs for use by the configuration software. The inputs are labeled
function codes.

Displaying DataCORDER Function Codes

1. Press the ALT. MODE key on the keypad.
2. Use the Arrow keys until “dC” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.
3. Press an Arrow key until the left window displays the desired function code number. The right window will
display the value of this item for five seconds before returning to the normal display mode. If a longer display
time is desired, press the ENTER key to extend the display time to 30 seconds.
The DataCORDER function code assignments (see Table 4–3) may be accessed by the operator to examine the
current input data or stored data.

Table 4–3 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments

NOTE
Functions that are not applicable will display “-----”
Code Title Description
dC1 Recorder Supply Temperature Current reading of the supply recorder sensor.
dC2 Recorder Return Temperature Current reading of the return recorder sensor.
dC3-5 USDA 1,2,3 Temperatures Current readings of the three USDA probes.
dC6-13 Network Data Points 1-8 Current values of the network data points (as configured). Data point 1
(Code 6) is generally the humidity sensor and its value is obtained from
the controller once every minute.
dC14 Cargo Probe 4 Temperature Current reading of the cargo probe #4.
dC15-19 Future Expansion These codes are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
dC20-24 Temperature Sensors 1-5 Current calibration offset values for each of the five probes: supply,
Calibration return, USDA #1, #2, and #3. These values are entered via the
interrogation program.
dC25 Future Expansion This code is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dC26,27 Future Expansion These codes are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
dC28 Minimum Days Left An approximation of the number of logging days remaining until the
DataCORDER starts to overwrite the existing data.
dC29 Days Stored Number of days of data that are currently stored in the DataCORDER.
dC30 Date of Last Trip start The date when a Trip Start was initiated by the user. In addition, if the
system goes without power for seven continuous days or longer, a trip
start will automatically be generated on the next AC power up. Press
and hold the ENTER key for five seconds to initiate a “Trip Start.”
dC31 Battery Test Results Shows the current status of the optional battery pack.
PASS: Battery pack is fully charged. FAIL: Battery pack voltage is low.
dC32 Time: Hour, Minute Current time on the real time clock (RTC) in the DataCORDER.
dC33 Date: Month, Day Current date (month and day) on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC34 Date: Year Current year on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC35 Cargo Probe 4 Calibration Current calibration value for the Cargo Probe. This value is an input via
the interrogation program.

T-372 4–16
4.6.3 DataCORDER Configuration Software
The configuration software controls the recording and alarm functions of the DataCORDER. Reprogramming to the
factory-installed configuration is achieved via the USB flash drive menu with a flash drive installed. An ML5 soft-
ware file or a compatible configuration database file must be on the USB flash drive in order to gain access to the
menu.
Displaying DataCORDER Configuration Variables
1. Press the ALT. MODE key on the keypad.
2. Use the Arrow keys until “dCF” is displayed.
3. Press the ENTER key.
4. Press an Arrow key until the left window displays the desired variable number. The right window will display
the value of this item for five seconds before returning to the normal display mode. If a longer display time is
desired, press the ENTER key to extend the display time to 30 seconds.
A list of the configuration variables is provided in Table 4–4. Descriptions of DataCORDER operation for each vari-
able setting are provided in the following paragraphs.

Table 4–4 DataCORDER Configuration Variables

Config Title Default Option
dCF01 (Future Use) -- --
dCF02 Sensor Configuration 2 2, 5, 6, 9, 54, 64, 94
dCF03 Logging Interval (Minutes) 60 15, 30, 60, 120
dCF04 Thermistor Format Short Long
dCF05 Thermistor Sampling Type A A, b, C
dCF06 Controlled Atmosphere / Humidity Sampling Type A A, b
dCF07 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 1 A Auto, On, Off
dCF08 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 2 A Auto, On, Off
dCF09 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 3 A Auto, On, Off
dCF10 Alarm Configuration Cargo Sensor A Auto, On, Off

4.6.4 Sensor Configuration (dCF02)

Two modes of operation may be configured, the Standard Mode and the Generic Mode.

Standard Mode
In the Standard Mode, the user may configure the DataCORDER to record data using one of seven standard config-
urations. The seven standard configuration variables, with their descriptions, are listed in Table 4–5.
The inputs of the six thermistors (supply, return, USDA #1, USDA #2, USDA #3 and cargo probe) and the humidity
sensor input will be generated by the DataCORDER.

NOTE
The DataCORDER software uses the supply and return recorder sensors (SRS, RRS). The tempera-
ture control software uses the supply and return temperature sensors (STS, RTS).
Table 4–5 DataCORDER Standard Configurations
Standard Config Description
2 sensors (dCF02=2) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
5 sensors (dCF02=5) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
6 sensors (dCF02=6) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input

4–17 T-372
 Table 4–5 DataCORDER Standard Configurations
Standard Config Description
6 sensors (dCF02=54) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
7 sensors (dCF02=64) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
9 sensors (dCF02=9) Not Applicable

Generic Mode
The Generic Mode allows user selection of the network data points to be recorded. The user may select up to a
total of eight data points for recording. Changing the configuration to generic and selecting which data points to
record may be done using the Carrier Transicold Data Retrieval Program. A list of the data points available for
recording follows.
1. Control mode
2. Control temperature
3. Frequency
4. Humidity
5. Phase A current
6. Phase B current
7. Phase C current
8. Main voltage
9. Evaporator expansion valve percentage
10. Discrete outputs (Bit mapped - require special handling if used)
11. Discrete inputs (Bit mapped - require special handling if used)
12. Ambient temperature sensor (AMBS)
13. Evaporator temperature sensor (ETS)
14. Compressor discharge temperature sensor (CPDS)
15. Return temperature sensor (RTS)
16. Supply temperature sensor (STS)
17. Defrost temperature sensor (DTS)
18. Discharge pressure transducer (DPT)
19. Suction pressure transducer (SPT)
20. Evaporator pressure transducer (EPT)
21. Vent position sensor (VPS)

4.6.5 Logging Interval (dCF03)

The user may select four different time intervals between data recordings. Data is logged at exact intervals in
accordance with the real time clock. The clock is factory set at Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

T-372 4–18
4.6.6 Thermistor Format (dCF04)
The user may configure the format in which the thermistor readings are recorded. The short resolution is a 1 byte
format and the long resolution is a 2 byte format. The short requires less memory and records temperature with
variable resolutions depending on temperature range. The long records temperature in 0.01°C (0.02°F) steps for
the entire range.

4.6.7 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06)

Three types of data sampling are available: average, snapshot and USDA. When configured to average, the aver-
age of readings taken every minute over the recording period is recorded. When configured to snapshot, the sen-
sor reading at the log interval time is recorded. When USDA is configured, supply and return temperature readings
are averaged and the three USDA probe readings are snapshot.

4.6.8 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10)

USDA and cargo probe alarms may be configured to OFF, ON or AUTO.
If a probe alarm is configured to OFF, the alarm for this probe is always disabled.
If a probe alarm is configured to ON, the associated alarm is always enabled.
If the probes are configured to AUTO, they act as a group. This function is designed to assist users who keep the
DataCORDER configured for USDA recording, but do not install the probes for every trip. If all the probes are dis-
connected, no alarms are activated. As soon as one of the probes is installed, all of the alarms are enabled and the
remaining probes that are not installed will give active alarm indications.

4.6.9 Stored Temperature Display (Scrollback)

The DataCORDER records temperatures from the supply sensor, return sensor, P1, P2, P3 and C4 cargo sensors.
The temperatures are recorded every hour.

Displaying Stored Temperatures

1. Press the ALT. MODE key on the keypad.
2. Use the Arrow keys until “dCdSP” is displayed.
3. Press the ENTER key.
4. Use the Arrow keys to toggle through S (supply), R (Return), P1, P2, P3 and C4 (Cargo) sensors.
5. Press the ENTER key and a temperature value will appear in the right window and 1 (with sensor designa-
tion) will appear in the left window to signify the temperature displayed is the most recent reading. Each
press of the down Arrow key displays the temperature one hour earlier.
6. Press the ENTER key to alternate between sensors and times / temperatures. And use Arrow keys for scrolling.

4.6.10 DataCORDER Power Up

The DataCORDER may be powered up in any one of the following methods:
1. Normal AC power: The DataCORDER is powered up when the unit is turned on via the Stop-Start switch.
2. Controller DC battery pack power: If a battery pack is installed, the DataCORDER will power up for commu-
nication when the user presses the battery key.
3. Real Time Clock demand: If the controller is equipped with a charged battery pack and AC power is not
present, the DataCORDER will power up when the real time clock indicates that a data recording should
take place. When the DataCORDER is finished recording, it will power down.
During DataCORDER power-up, while using battery-pack power, the controller will perform a hardware voltage
check on the battery. If the hardware check passes, the controller will energize and perform a software battery volt-
age check before DataCORDER logging. If either test fails, the real time clock battery power-up will be disabled
until the next AC power cycle. Also, DataCORDER temperature logging will be prohibited until that time.
An alarm will be generated when the battery voltage transitions from good to bad indicating that the battery pack
needs recharging. If the alarm condition persists for more than 24 hours on continuous AC power, it indicates that
the battery pack needs replacement.

4–19 T-372
4.6.11 Pre-Trip Data Recording
The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a pre-trip test (refer to Section 4.5) and the results of each test
included in pre-trip. The data is time-stamped and may be extracted via the Data Retrieval program. See Table 4–
10 for a description of the data stored in the DataCORDER for each corresponding pre-trip test.

4.6.12 USDA Cold Treatment

Sustained cold temperature has been employed as a post-harvest method for the control of fruit flies and other
insect genera. The commodity, insect species, treatment temperatures and exposure times are found in sections
T107, T108, and T109 of the USDA Treatment Manual.
In response to the demand to replace fumigation with this environmentally sound process, Carrier has integrated
Cold Treatment capability into its microprocessor system. These units have the ability to maintain supply air tem-
perature within one quarter degree Celsius of setpoint and record minute changes in product temperature within
the DataCORDER memory, thus meeting USDA criteria.

USDA Recording
A special type of recording is used for USDA cold treatment purposes. Cold treatment recording requires three
remote temperature probes be placed at prescribed locations in the cargo. Provision is made to connect these
probes to the DataCORDER via receptacles located at the rear left-hand side of the unit. Four or five receptacles
are provided. The four 3-pin receptacles are for the probes. The 5-pin receptacle is for the Interrogator. The probe
receptacles are sized to accept plugs with tri-cam coupling locking devices. A label on the back panel of the unit
shows which receptacle is used for each probe.
The standard DataCORDER report displays the supply and return air temperatures. The cold treatment report dis-
plays USDA #1, #2, #3 and the supply and return air temperatures. Cold treatment recording is backed up by a bat-
tery so recording can continue if AC power is lost.

USDA / Message Trip Comment

A special feature in DataLINE allows the user to enter a USDA (or other) message in the header of a data report.
The maximum message length is 78 characters. Only one message will be recorded per day.

4.6.13 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure

The following is a summary of the steps required to initiate a USDA Cold Treatment.
If configured for USDA probes setup can be verified as follows (See DataLine User manual 62-10629 for more
details):
1. Ensure the DataCorder is configured as follows:
a. Configuration Option is set for USDA probes and logging interval set for 60 minutes.
b. Sensor is set to “2 Averaged 3-USDA.”
c. The resolution is set to “Normal.”

Figure 4.11 DataCORDER Configuration Screen

T-372 4–20
2. Calibrate the three USDA probes by ice bathing the probes and performing the calibration function with the
DataLINE. This calibration procedure generates the probe offsets which are stored in the controller and
applied to the USDA sensors for use in generating sensor type reports (see Figure 4.12).
Figure 4.12 DataCorder Probe Calibration Screen

3. Pre-cool the container to the treatment temperature or below.

4. Install the controller battery pack (if not already installed).
5. Check the battery status by pressing the CODE SELECT key and using the Arrow keys to bring up code
Cd19. Select btESt.
6. Place the three probes. Refer to the USDA Treatment Manual for directions on placement of probes in fruit
and probe locations in container.
Sensor 1 (USDA1): Place in a box at the top of the stack of the fruit nearest to the air return intake.
Sensor 2 (USDA2): Place slightly aft of the middle of the container, halfway between the top and bottom
of the stack.
Sensor 3 (USDA3): Place one pallet stack in from the doors of the container, halfway between the top
and bottom of the stack.
7. To initiate USDA recording, connect the personal computer and enter ISO header information using the
DataLINE software.
a. Enter ISO header information.
b. Enter a trip comment if desired.
Figure 4.13 DataCorder Probe Calibration Screen

4–21 T-372
 c. Using the System Tools screen in the DataLine software perform a “trip start.” See Figure 4.14.

Figure 4.14 DataCORDER Systems Tool Screen

4.6.14 ISO Trip Header

DataLINE provides the user with an interface to view / modify current settings of the ISO trip header through the
ISO Trip Header screen.
The ISO Trip Header screen is displayed when the user clicks on the “ISO Trip Header” button in the “Trip Func-
tions” Group Box on the System Tools screen.
F9 function - Provides the user with a shortcut for manually triggering the refresh operation. Before sending modi-
fied parameter values, the user must ensure that a successful connection is established with the controller.
If the connection is established with the DataCORDER, the current contents of the ISO Trip Header from the Data-
CORDER will be displayed in each field. If the connection is not established with the DataCORDER, all fields on
the screen will be displayed as “Xs.” If at any time during the display of the ISO Trip Header screen the connection
is not established or is lost, the user is alerted to the status of the connection.
After modifying the values and ensuring a successful connection has been made with the DataCORDER, click on
the “Send” button to send the modified parameter values.
The maximum allowed length of the ISO Trip Header is 128 characters. If the user tries to refresh the screen or
close the utility without sending the changes made on the screen to the DataCORDER, the user is alerted with a
message.

4.6.15 DataCORDER Communications

Data can be retrieved from the DataCORDER and viewed with DataLINE software or the DataLINE Connect app
(see Figure 4.15). DataLINE allows interrogation, configuration variable assignment, screen view of the data, hard
copy report generation, cold treatment probe calibration and file management.
The ML5 controller allows this data retrieval via wired or wireless communications. See Section 4.7 for a descrip-
tion of ML5 communications. When connecting hard-wired with a cable, DataLINE software will be used. When
connecting wirelessly to a phone or tablet, the DataLINE Connect App will be used.
Procedures and information related to DataLINE software and its interface with the DataCorder can be found in the
62-10629 DataLINE User Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the
manual from the Literature section, select Data Tools > DataLINE > All Documents.

T-372 4–22
 Figure 4.15 DataLINE and DataLINE Connect
DataLINE software

DataLINE Connect App

4.7 Controller Communications

4.7.1 Controller Wired Communications
Connect to the ML5 controller’s micro USB port with a flash drive or cable:
• Use a flash drive to upload ML5 Controller Software with the ALT. MODE > USb menu.
• Use a flash drive to perform Controller Configuration / Setup tasks with the ALT. MODE > USb menu.
• Use a flash drive to download DataCORDER data with the ALT. MODE > USb menu.
• Connect a cable from a PC/laptop to view DataCORDER data with DataLINE or DataLINE Connect.

NOTE
If connecting a USB cable from the controller to a Windows 10 computer, follow the procedure in the
DataLINE manual to set up a static IP address.
Connect via Interrogator Receptacle:
• The unit may be fitted with an optional external interrogator receptacle for connection of equipment for cali-
bration and also to download recorded data from the DataCORDER.

NOTE
Downloading using the USDA port inside of the container is not supported by DataLINE.

4.7.2 Controller Wireless Communications

The ML5 controller offers short range wireless connectivity through wireless 802.11 b/g/n. A mobile device can
wirelessly connect to the ML5 controller using the DataLINE Connect app.

NOTE
Wireless connectivity may only operate when ambient temperatures are above -20°C (-4°F). Connec-
tivity will be intermittent below this temperature.
The unit display module provides a wireless menu that allows access to all necessary parameters needed for wire-
less configuration and status checks.

4.7.2.a Displaying the Wireless Settings Menu

1. On the keypad, press the ALT. MODE key.
2. Use the Arrow keys until "nEt" is displayed, then press the “ENTER” key.
3. The nEt menu is now active and menu options are accessible. See Table 4–6 for menu description.

4–23 T-372
 Table 4–6 Wireless Settings Menu (nEt) Options
Option Description
EnbL Enable / Disable Wireless Connection (On/Off).
If On, wireless mode shall be initialized according to the last saved wireless role. If Off, all
existing wireless connections will be shut down and wireless is disabled.
• Controller will enable wireless by default.
• Wireless will not be initialized if the system is running a battery and not on AC / USB 5V.
• Wireless can be forcefully shut down in some cases during battery operation.
PASSW View Wireless Connection Passcode.
The wireless connectivity passcode accessed here can establish a connection from your
wireless computer / tablet / phone to the ML5 controller.
• Passcode resets every four hours (based on system clock).
• Passcode is good for the customer's fleet (assuming all clocks are set properly).
• If communicating at the passcode change time boundary, the session can run for an
additional 4 hours without changing the passcode.

4.7.2.b Enabling or Disabling the Controller Wireless Network

1. On the keypad, press the ALT. MODE key.
2. Use the Arrow keys until "nEt" is displayed, then press the ENTER key.
3. Use the Arrow keys until "EnbL" is displayed, then press the ENTER key. The right display value will flash.
4. Use the Arrow keys to select "On" or "OFF, then press the ENTER key to confirm the selection.

4.7.2.c Looking Up the Controller Wireless Network Passcode

1. On the keypad, press the ALT. MODE key.
2. Use the Arrow keys until "nEt" is displayed, then press the ENTER key.
3. Use the Arrow keys until "PASSw EntR" is displayed, then press the ENTER key.
4. The display will show the eight character passcode that is required to connect a device to this unit’s control-
ler. Write this value down.

4.7.2.d Communicating with the Controller using DataLINE Connect (IOS Device)
This procedure explains how to open the DataLINE Connect application and connect it directly to a unit’s controller.
1. Open the DataLINE Connect application.
2. Open the WiFi Settings menu (or Settings menu).
3. Under “Wi-Fi Login Credentials”, type in the Container ID of the unit to connect to. If this unit has already
been entered, select from the list of available wireless connections.
4. Next to “Passcode” (or “Token”), enter the passcode obtained from the Net menu on the display if it is not
already shown there. See Section 4.7.2.c for reference.
5. Select Login.
6. When DataLINE connect is connected, a message will appear “Connected to the WIFI successfully”.
7. After clicking OK to the message, the features of DataLINE Connect are now available. Refer to DataLINE
Connect user manual for more detailed procedures for using DataLINE Connect.

T-372 4–24
4.7.2.e Communicating with the Controller using DataLINE Connect (Android Device)
This procedure explains how to open the DataLINE Connect application and connect it directly to a unit’s controller.
1. Open the DataLINE Connect application.
2. Open the WiFi Settings menu (or Settings menu).
3. Verify that the “Wi-Fi ON” indicator is enabled.
4. Under “Wi-Fi Login Credentials”, specify the name of the wireless connection next to “Container ID” by
selecting from the list of available WiFi connections, or by typing in the Container ID of the unit you want to
connect to.
5. Next to “Passcode” (or “Token”), enter the passcode obtained from the Net menu on the display if it is not
already shown there. to Section 4.7.2.c for reference.
6. Select Login.
7. The message will appear “Connected to the WIFI successfully”. The controller wireless network name
appears on the top right corner of the interface.
8. After clicking OK to the message, the features of DataLINE Connect are now available. Refer to DataLINE
Connect user manual for more detailed procedures for using DataLINE Connect.

4.8 Controller Configuration Variables

Table 4–7 Controller Configuration Variables

Config Title Default Option
CnF02 Evaporator Fan Speed dS (Dual) SS (Single)
CnF03 Control Temperature Sensors FOUr duAL
CnF04 Enable Dehumidification On OFF
CnF08 Evaporator Motor Type 1Ph 3Ph
CnF09 Refrigerant Type r134a r744
CnF11 Defrost “Off” Selection noOFF OFF
CnF15 Enable Discharge Temperature Sensor Out In
CnF16 Enable DataCORDER On (Yes) (Not Allowed)
CnF17 Enable Discharge Pressure Sensor Out (No) In (Yes)
CnF18 Heater Type Old (Low Watt) nEW (High Watt)
CnF20 Enable Suction Pressure Transducer Out (No) In (Yes)
CnF22 Economy Mode OFF Std, Full
CnF23 Enable Defrost Interval Save noSAv SAv
CnF24 Enable Long Pre-Trip Test Series Auto Auto2, Auto 3
CnF25 Enable Pre-Trip Data Recording rSLtS dAtA
CnF26 Heat Lockout Temperature Set to -10C Set to -5C
CnF27 Enable Suction Temperature Sensor Out In
CnF28 Enable Bulb Mode NOr bULb
CnF31 Probe Check SPEC Std
CnF32 Enable Single Evaporator Operation 2EF0 (Not Allowed)
CnF33 Enable Snap Freeze OFF SnAP
CnF34 Temperature Unit Display nOth F
CnF37 Electronic Chart Probe rEtUR SUPPL, bOth
CnF41 Enable Low DTT Setting Out In
CnF44 Autoslide Enable Out LO, UP

4–25 T-372
 Table 4–7 Controller Configuration Variables (Continued)
Config Title Default Option
CnF45 Low Humidity Enabled Out In
CnF46 Quench / Liquid Injection Valve Type nO=0=no nC=1=nc
CnF47 Vent Position OFF UP, LOW, CUStOM
CnF49 OEM Reset Option OFF 0-off,1-std, 2-spec,3-cust
CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface 0-out 1-in
CnF51 Timed Defrost Disable 0-out 1-in
CnF52 Oil Return Algorithm 0-out 1-in
CnF53 Water Cool Oil Return Logic 0-out 1-in
CnF55 TXV Boost Relay 0-out 1-in
CnF56 TXV Boost Circuit 0-out 1-in
CnF57 PWM Compressor Control 0-out 1-in
CnF59 Electronic Evaporator Expansion Valve 0-none 1-EC, 2-KE, 3-NA
CnF61 ACT ASC Control Enable 0-out 1-in
CnF62 Extended Temperature Control Enable 0-out 1-in
CnF63 QUEST Pre-Trip / TripWise Default State 0-on 1-off
CnF67 Air Heaters 0-out 1-in
CnF70 Enable XtendFRESH Logic 0-out 1-in
CnF71 XtendFRESH Pre-Trip / TripWise Default State 0-off 1-on
CnF74 TripWise Pre-Trip / TripWise Default State 0-off 1-on
CnF78 XtendFRESH Scrubber Output Available 0-out 1-in
Note: Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading configuration
software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by the controller programming.

4.9 Controller Function Codes

Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes

Code Title Description

NOTICE
Note: If the function is not applicable, the display will read “-----”
Display Only Functions - Cd01 through Cd26 are display only functions.
Cd01 Capacity Modulation Displays the DUV percent closed. The right display reads 100% when the valve
(%) is fully closed. The valve will usually be at 10% on start up of the unit except in
very high ambient temperatures.
Cd03 Compressor Motor The current sensor measures current draw in lines L1 & L2 by all of the high
Current voltage components. It also measures current draw in compressor motor leg T3.
The compressor leg T3 current is displayed.
Cd04 Line Current, Phase A The current sensor measures current on two legs. The third unmeasured leg is
calculated based on a current algorithm. The current measured is used for
control and diagnostic purposes. For control processing, the highest of the Phase
Cd05 Line Current, Phase B
A and B current values is used for current limiting purposes. For diagnostic
processing, the current draws are used to monitor component energization.
Cd06 Line Current, Phase C Whenever a heater or a motor is turned ON or OFF, the current draw increase/
reduction for that activity is measured. The current draw is then tested to
determine if it falls within the expected range of values for the component. Failure
of this test will result in a pre-trip failure or a control alarm indication.

T-372 4–26
 Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd07 Main Power Voltage The main supply voltage is displayed.
Cd08 Main Power Frequency The value of the main power frequency is displayed in Hertz. The frequency
displayed will be halved if either fuse F1 or F2 is bad (alarm code AL021).
Cd09 Ambient Temperature The ambient sensor reading is displayed.
Cd10 Compressor Suction Evaporator temperature sensor reading is shown on the right display.
Temperature /
Evaporator
Temperature
Cd11 Compressor Dome Compressor discharge temperature sensor reading, using compressor dome
Temperature / temperature, is displayed.
Discharge
Temperature
Cd12 Compressor Suction Reading for evaporator pressure transducer (EPT) is shown on the left display;
Port Pressure / Press the ENTER key at Cd12 to show reading for compressor suction port
Evaporator Pressure pressure on right display.
Cd14 Compressor Discharge Compressor discharges pressure transducer reading is displayed.
Pressure
Cd15 Digital Unloader Valve The status of the valve is displayed (Open - Closed).
Cd16 Compressor Motor This code displays the compressor motor hours. Press the ENTER key while in
State / Unit Run Time Cd16 to view unit run time. Total hours are recorded in increments of 10 hours
Hour Meter (i.e., 3000 hours is displayed as 300).
Press and hold the ENTER key for 5 seconds to reset the Compressor Motor
Hour Meter display. The Unit Run Time Hour Meter cannot be reset.
Cd17 Relative Humidity (%) Humidity sensor reading is displayed. This code displays the relative humidity, as
a percent value.
Cd18 Software Revision The software revision number is displayed.
Number
Cd19 Battery Check Request backup battery test and display results or scroll to last result.
After selecting CD19, press the ENTER key while “btESt” is displayed to run the
backup battery test. While the test is running, “btESt” will flash on the display.
Once the test is complete, the Backup Battery Test Result will be displayed. After
5 seconds, the controller returns to displaying the setpoint.
For the Test Result:
• If the test result is Pass, the display will show “PASS” to indicate this.
• If the test result is End of Life, the display will show “EOL” to indicate this.
• If the test result is Fail, the display will show “FAIL” to indicate this.
• If the test result detects a temperature out of range condition (greater
than 45 deg C), the display will show “toor” to indicate this. The smart bat-
tery will not charge.
• If the test result is Non-Carrier, the display will show “not C” to indicate this.
• If the test result is No Battery, the display will show “nobAt” to indicate this.
If the ENTER key is not pressed in 5 seconds, then the controller returns to
displaying the setpoint.
Whenever the battery test is run, the Relative State of Charge (RSOC) is posted
in the download.

4–27 T-372
 Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd20 Config / Model Number This code indicates the dash number of the model for which the Controller is
configured (i.e., if the unit is a 69NT40-551-100, the display will show “51100”).
To display controller configuration database information, press the ENTER key.
Values in “CFYYMMDD” format are displayed if the controller was configured
with a configuration card or with a valid OEM serial port configuration update;
YYMMDD represents the publication date of the model configuration database.
Cd21 Capacity Mode The mode of operation is displayed (Standard - Economized).
Cd22 Compressor State The status of the compressor is displayed (OFF, On).
Cd23 Evaporator Fan State Displays the current evaporator fan state (OFF, LOW, HIGH).
Cd25 Compressor Run Time This code displays the time remaining until the unit goes into defrost (in tenths of
Remaining Until an hour). This value is based on the actual accumulated compressor running
Defrost time.
Cd26 Defrost Temperature Defrost temperature sensor reading is displayed.
Sensor Reading
Configurable Functions - Cd27 through Cd37 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd27 Defrost Interval (Hours This is the desired period of time between defrost cycles. Factory default is
or Automatic) “AUTO”. See Section 4.3.20 for information on Defrost Interval.
CnF11 determines whether the operator will be allowed to chose “OFF” as a
defrost interval option.
After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used
until the next defrost termination, the next time the DTT contacts are OPEN, or
the next time power to the control is interrupted. If the previous value or the new
value is “OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
If any Auto Pre-trip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to ‘AUTO’ unless
CnF49 (OEM Reset) is set to “Custom”.
Cd28 Temperature Units This code determines the temperature units (C or F) that will be used for all
(Degrees C or Degrees temperature displays. The user selects C or F by selecting function code Cd28
F) and press the ENTER key. The factory default value is Celsius units. This
function code will display “-----” if CnF34 is set to F.
Cd29 Failure Action (Mode) If all of the control sensors are out of range (alarm code AL026) or there is a
probe circuit calibration failure (alarm code AL027), the unit will enter the
shutdown state defined by this setting. The user selects one of four possible
actions as follows:
A - Full Cooling (Compressor is on, economized operation.)
b - Partial Cooling (Compressor is on, standard operation.)
C - Evaporator Fan Only (Evaporator fans on high speed, not applicable with
frozen setpoints.)
d - Full System Shutdown - Factory Default (Shut down every component in unit.)

T-372 4–28
 Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd30 In-Range Tolerance The in-range tolerance will determine the temperature band around the setpoint
which will be designated as in-range.
For normal temperature control, control temperature is considered in range if it is
within setpoint in-range Tolerance. There are four possible values:
1 = +/- 0.5°C (+/-0.9°F)
2 = +/- 1.0°C (+/-1.8°F)
3 = +/- 1.5°C (+/-2.7°F)
4 = +/- 2.0°C (+/-3.6°F) - Factory Default
If the control temperature is in-range, the green IN-RANGE light is illuminated.
In-range tolerance shall be set to +/- 2.0°C upon activation of dehumidification or
Bulb Mode (Cd33, Cd35, Cd48).
When CCPC is actively controlling, in-range tolerance is not considered.
“-----” will be displayed whenever Dehumidification or Bulb Mode is enabled or
when CCPC with six hour re-activation is actively controlling.
“-----” will be displayed whenever Frozen Economy Mode is operating.
Cd31 Stagger Start Offset The stagger start offset time is the amount of time that the unit will delay at start-
Time (Seconds) up, thus allowing multiple units to stagger their control initiation when all units are
powered up together. The eight possible offset values are 0 (Factory Default), 3,
6, 9, 12, 15, 18 or 21 seconds.
Cd32 System Current Limit The current limit is the maximum current draw allowed on any phase at any time.
(Amperes) Limiting the unit’s current reduces the load on the main power supply. When
desirable, the limit can be lowered. Note, however, that capacity is also reduced.
The five values for 460 VAC operation are: 15, 17, 19, 21, or 23 amperes. The
factory default setting is 21 amperes.
Cd33 Humidity Setpoint This is the value in percent to which the system will dehumidify. There are
configuration variables that determine whether dehumidification capabilities are
installed. In the Test Mode, the setpoint will be temporarily set to 1%, allowing the
test of dehumidification. After 5 minutes, the normal setpoint is restored. If the
unit is configured for dehumidification, then the entire setpoint range will apply to
dehumidification. If Pre-trip is initiated, this value will be set to “OFF”
automatically.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface is active.)
Cd34 Economy Mode (On- The current state of the Economy Mode option, “-----”, On, or Off. CnF22
Off) determines whether Economy Mode offered. Economy Mode is a user selectable
mode of operation provided for power saving purposes.
Cd35 Bulb Mode The current state of the Bulb Mode option, “-----”, nOr, or bULb.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
Bulb Mode is an extension of dehumidification control (Cd33). If dehumidification
(CnF04) is set to “Off,” Cd35 will display “Nor” and the user will be unable to
change it. CnF28 determines whether the Bulb Mode selection is offered.
After a dehumidification setpoint has been selected and entered for code Cd33,
the user may then change Cd35 to “bulb.” After Bulb Mode has been selected
and entered, the user may then utilize function codes Cd36 and Cd37 to make
the desired changes.

4–29 T-372
 Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd36 Evaporator Fan Speed This is the desired evaporator fan speed for use during the bulb Dehumidification
and Humidification Mode option.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
This code is enabled only if in the Dehumidification Mode (Cd33) and Bulb Mode
(Cd35) has been set to “bulb.” If these conditions are not met, “alt” will be
displayed (indicating that the evaporator fans will alternate their speed) and the
display cannot be changed.
If a dehumidification setpoint has been selected along with Bulb Mode then “alt”
may be selected for alternating speed, “Lo” for low speed evaporator fan only, or
“Hi” for high speed evaporator fan only.
If a setting other than “alt” has been selected and Bulb Mode is deactivated in any
manner, then selection reverts back to “alt.”
Cd37 Variable DTT Setting This is the variable defrost termination thermostat setting to be used with the
(Bulb Mode) optional Bulb Mode functionality. This item is only displayed if the Bulb Mode
option is configured on.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface is active.)
Display Only Functions - Cd38 through Cd40 are display only functions.
Cd38 Secondary Supply Cd38 will display the current supply recorder sensor (SRS) reading for units
Temperature Sensor configured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd38
will display “-----.” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, Cd38 will display the
supply recorder sensor reading.
Cd39 Secondary Return Cd39 will display the current return recorder sensor (RRS) reading for units
Temperature Sensor configured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd39
will display “-----.” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, Cd39 will display the
return recorder sensor reading.
Cd40 Container Identification If a valid container id exists, the default display for Cd40 will be “cd40_XXXXX”
Number where “XXXXX” is the 5th character through the 9th character of the container id.
Press the Enter key while on Cd40 to display “id_YYYYYYY” where “YYYYYYY”
is the 5th character to the 11th character of the container id.
If no valid container id exists or the container id is blank, the default display will
have Cd40 on the left display and the right display will alternate between “_nEEd”
and “___id”. Press the ENTER key while on Cd40 in this state to prompt the Set
Id Interface.
On start up if the container id is not valid, Cd40 will be brought up on the display
for the first minute of power up. This can be left by either entering a container id
or leaving the code select normally.
Cd40 is configured at commissioning to read a valid container identification
number. The reading will not display alpha characters; only the numeric portion
of the number will display.
Cd41 Valve Override SERVICE FUNCTION: This code is used for troubleshooting, and allows manual
positioning of the economizer solenoid valve, electronic expansion valve, and
digital unloader valve. Provides readings such as: Percent Capacity, EEV,
Capacity Mode, LIV and DUV. See Section 7.25 for operating instructions.
Configurable Functions - Cd43 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function
to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd43 XtendFRESH Mode Cd43 has three selectable modes of operation:
FRESH - All XtendFRESH operations are enabled and setpoints for CO2 and O2
can be edited.
OFF - All XtendFRESH operations are disabled.
TEST - the operator has the ability to test operation of mechanical components,
test and calibrate the CO2 sensors and verify the validity of the O2 sensor.

T-372 4–30
 Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Display Only Function - Cd44 is a display only function.
Cd44 XtendFRESH Values | When XtendFRESH option enabled:
EverFRESH Values Cd44 allows the user to view the following XtendFRESH values: CO2 setpoint,
CO2 percentage, O2 setpoint, O2 percentage, and O2 voltage.
For the CO2 setpoint, the range is from 0 to 19% in 1% increments with a default
setting of 5%. For the O2 setpoint, the range is from 3% to 21% in 1% increments
with a default setting of 10%.
When EverFRESH option enabled:
Cd44 allows the user to view the following EverFRESH values: CO2 setpoint,
CO2 percentage, O2 setpoint, O2 percentage, O2 voltage, and MPT pressure.
For the CO2 setpoint, the range is from 2 to 19% in 1% increments with a default
setting of 5%. For the O2 setpoint, the range is from 3% to 17% in 1% increments
with a default setting of 10%.
Configurable Functions - Cd45 through Cd48 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd45 Vent Position Sensor Values: 0 to 240 for UPPER / 0 to 225 for LOWER
(VPS) Position This function code will be dashed out if not configured for VPS.
When configured for VPS, Cd45 displays the current vent position in units of 5
CMH (units displayed as “CM”) or CFM (units displayed as “CF”) depending on
the selection of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the
pressing of the deg C/F key.
Cd45 will display whenever the control detects movement via the sensor unless
AL50 is active. Cd45 will display for 30 seconds, then time out and return to the
normal display mode.
Cd46 Airflow Display Units Selects the airflow units to be displayed by Cd45 if configured for Vent Position
Sensor or displayed by “USER/FLO” under Cd43 if configured for Autoslide.
CF = Cubic Feet per Minute
CM = Cubic Meters per Hour
bOth = Displays CF or CM depending on the setting of Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or
the pressing of the degree C/F key.
Cd47 Variable Economy Used when Economy Mode (CnF22) is set to 3-cust. Display will show “----” when
Temperature Setting the unit is not configured for Economy Mode.
When the unit has a perishable setpoint and Economy Mode is active, at the start
of each cooling or heating cycle, high speed evaporator fans will run for 3
minutes. After three minutes, the evaporator fans will be switched to low speed
any time that the supply temperature is within +/- 0.25°C of the setpoint and the
return temperature is less than or equal to the supply temperature + the user
selected Cd47 (values are 0.5°C - 4.0°C, default is 3.0°C).

4–31 T-372
 Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd48 Dehumidification / Bulb Initially Cd48 will display current dehumidification-mode; bUlb - bulb cargo mode,
Cargo Mode Parameter dEhUM - normal dehumidification, or OFF - off. This display is steady.
Selection Press the ENTER key to take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus (mode, setpoint, evaporator speed, DTT setting). Press the
ENTER key in any parameter selection menu to commit selection of the currently
displayed parameter and cause the interface to descend into the next parameter
selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a blank display
and the current selection in the right hand display.
Press the CODE SELECT key in a selection menu to cancel the current selection
activity and ascend back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd48 display
mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds, the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any
previously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration
options and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Whenever any pre-trip test is initiated, dehumidification-mode goes to OFF.
Whenever dehumidification-mode goes to OFF:
• Dehumidification control setpoint goes to0%RHinternally but will then ini-
tialize to 95% RH when dehumidification-mode leaves OFF.
• Evaporator speed select goes to Alt for units without PWM Compressor
Control (Cnf57 = Out), Evaporator speed select goes to Hi for units with
PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In).
• DTT setting goes to 25.6_C or 18.0_C, depending on Cnf41.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to bUlb, DTT setting goes to 18.0°C if it
had been set higher.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to dEhUM, DTT setting goes to 25.6°C
or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
For units without PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = Out):
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set below 65% RH evapo-
rator speed select goes to LO if it had been set to Hi.
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set above 64% RH evapo-
rator speed select goes to Alt if it had been set to LO.
For units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In):
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set below 60% RH, the
evaporator fan speed is set to LO, the user has the ability to set the evap-
orator fan speed to Hi via the keypad.
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set equal to or above 60%
RH, the evaporator fan speed is set to Hi, the user has the ability to set
the evaporator fan speed to LO via the keypad.
Display Only Function - Cd49 is a display only function.
Cd49 Days Since Last Displays the number of days since last successful pre-trip sequence.
Successful Pre-Trip Press the ENTER key to view the number of days since the last successful pre-
trip for Auto1, Auto2, and Auto2 in sequence.
Press the CODE SELECT key to step back through the list and ultimately to exit
the Cd49 display.
Configurable Functions - Cd50 through Cd53 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.Cd50

T-372 4–32
 Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd50 QUEST Enable / ”OFF” = disabled.
Disable ”On” = enabled.
”SEtPt” = suspended by setpoint too low.
”CAHUM” = suspended by CA or humidity control.
”ACt” = suspended by ACT active.
”FAIL” = all return temperature probe failure for QUEST.
”PrtrP” = pre-trip active.
”C LIM” = suspended by cool limit logic.
”PULL” = pulldown active.
“ALArM ” = suspended by shutdown alarm
Press the ENTER key, Arrow keys, and then ENTER key to select “OFF” or “On”.
If “On” is selected, QUEST operation may be suspended as indicated by one of
the suspension codes listed above. If QUEST is not “OFF” and is not suspended,
“On” will be displayed.
Cd51 Automatic Cold Automatic Cold Treatment (ACT) mode:
Treatment (ACT) Mode Cd51 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
Parameter Selection
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ACT has completed
“ACt” value “On” “OFF” or “----“Display /Select: default “OFF“
“trEAt” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “0.0°C“
“DAyS” value “0 – 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “0”
“ProbE” value Probe positions ex ’1 2 _ 4’ ’1 _ 3 _’ Display: default “---- “
“SPnEW” value °C / °F on 0.1° increments Display/Select: default “10.0°C “
Initially Cd51 will display current countdown timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr),
default “0_0.
See Section 5.11 for procedure to set ACT using Cd51.
Press the ENTER key to take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus (act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting).
Press the ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus to commit
selection of the currently displayed parameter and cause the interface to
descend into the next parameter selection menu. All parameter selection menus
alternate between a blank display and the current selection in the right hand
display.
Press the CODE SELECT key in a selection menu to cancel the current selection
activity and ascend back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd51 display
mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds, the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any
previously committed changes are retained.
Parameter with the exception of “Act” may not be altered if Cd51 is re-entered if
“Act” is “On”. When ACT has completed including reaching the new setpoint
“done” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display
will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ACT off clears this
entry. This action also resets Cd51 to initial time remaining. ACT must then be
turned on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto pre-trip test or Trip Start is initiated, ACT mode goes to OFF.

4–33 T-372
 Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd53 Automatic Setpoint Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) Mode:
Change (ASC) Mode Cd53 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
Parameter Selection
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ASC has completed
“ASC” value “On” “OFF” Display /Select: default “OFF“
“nSC” value “1 - 6” (This is the value “n” for the subsequent entries).
“SP (n-1)” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default
“10.0°C“
“DAY (n-1)” value “1 – 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “1“
“SP (n)” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “10.0°C
Initially Cd53 will display current count down timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr),
default “0_0
Press the ENTER key to take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus, (mode, act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting). Press the
ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus to select the currently
displayed parameter and cause the interface to descend into the next parameter
selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a blank display
and the current selection in the right hand display.
Press the CODE SELECT key in a selection menu to cancel the current selection
activity and ascend back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd53 display
mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any
previously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration
options and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Parameter with the exception of “ASC” may not be altered if Cd53 is re-entered
if “ASC” is “On”. When ASC has completed including reaching the last setpoint
“done” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display
will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ASC off clears this
entry. This action also resets Cd53 to initial time remaining. ASC must then be
turned on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto pre-trip test or Trip Start is initiated, ASC mode goes to OFF.
Display Only Functions - Cd54 through Cd58 are display only functions.
Cd54 Suction Port Superheat Reading for evaporator superheat (suction temperature minus suction saturation
/ Electronic Expansion temperature as calculated from suction pressure) is shown on the right display.
Valve Status Press the ENTER key at Cd54 to show reading for EEV position (in %) on left
display.
Cd55 Discharge Superheat Cd55 will display discharge superheat (discharge temperature minus discharge
saturation temperature as calculated from discharge pressure) values in C /F as
calculated by the discharge temperature minus the discharge saturation
temperature as calculated from discharge pressure.
“-----” will be displayed if selection is not valid.

T-372 4–34
 Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd58 Water Pressure Switch Cd58 will display “CLOSE” if the WPS or CFS switch contacts are closed or if
/ Condenser Fan these options are not installed. “OPEn” is displayed when the WPS or CFS switch
Switch State or contacts are open. When the WPS/CFS Override Logic is “TRUE”, the right
Override Logic State display will flash on all units.
NOTE:
1. This CLOSE/OPEn state displayed in this Code Select function only applies to
units that have the ability to detect the state of a WPS/CFS. This function should
not be relied upon to display the condition of the switch on units that don’t have
a WPS/CFS switch connected to ECG2 exclusively.
2. The right display will flash if the WPS/CFS Override Logic is TRUE on all units.
This is always the case, whether the unit has a WPS or CFS installed or not.
3. The ability of the WPS/CFS Override Logic to control the condenser fan is
limited. It is not possible for this logic to control the fan on units that have the WPS
or CFS wired in series with the fan contactor. Units wired in this configuration can
indicate that the WPS/CFS Override Logic is active by flashing the right display,
however, the wiring will not allow for control of the condenser fan.
Configurable Functions - Cd59 through Cd61 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd59 Pump Down Logic Cd59 allows operation of the pump down logic control. The display will flash
between “STArT PdN” and “PrESS EnTEr”.
Upon entering Cd59 the operator will be required to acknowledge that they want
to initiate the pump down control. The display will flash between “STArT PdN”
and “PrESS EnTEr”. Once the decision to continue is confirmed pump down logic
will begin, and will take complete control of the unit until pump down either
succeeds or fails. This operation can not be halted once it begins without power
cycling the unit.
After pump down logic has been initiated, the operator will be notified to close the
Liquid Line Valve, the display will flash between “CLOSE LLV” and “PrESS
EnTEr”. Once complete the display will read “P dN” to the left, and the current
suction pressure to the right.
If the automatic pump down logic succeeds within 20 minutes, the unit will turn
itself off, and the display will notify the operator that pump down is complete by
flashing between “P dN DOnE” and “SHUT OFF”. The operator must then shut
off the unit.
If the automatic pump down logic does not complete within 20 minutes, the unit
will drop out of Cd59 and return to its previous control condition.
Cd63 FuelWise Cd63 is used to enable FuelWise.
Following a power cycle, the state of the function select code is retained at its
state prior to the power cycle if CNF72 = Default ON else if Default OFF this will
be set to OFF. If “On”, this function select code will be set to “OFF” when any trip
start occurs or any pretrip test is initiated.
Event 120 shall be logged when ever CD63 is Turned ON OR if CD63 state is ON
at Mid night.
“-----” will be displayed if Cnf72 is configured OFF.

4–35 T-372
 Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd65 TripWise If the function is off, display "OFF". If the function is on, display "ON".
“-----” will be displayed if the TripWise option is not active for the current
configuration.
Press the ENTER key. The existing entry will flash. Use the Arrow keys to
alternate between OFF and ON. Press ENTER again to set the Expiration
Interval.
Left display: “dAyS”
Right display: Expiration Interval 2 through 365 in 1 day increments.
Default value is 30.
Cd66 Instantaneous Power Real power in kW currently being used by the system.
(kW) Value is “-----“,“ nnn.n
Display “-----“ if not configured else nnn.n
Cd67 Total Power (kW-hr) Energy used by the system, in kW-hrs, since last Trip Start.
Value is “-----“,“ nnnnn
Display “-----“ if not configured else nnnnn
Cd70 Temp Setpoint Lock Cd70 locks out setpoint selection, requiring the user to manually turn the lock off,
prior to making a setpoint change. If the setpoint lock is “ON”, and the user
attempts to enter a new setpoint, a message “SPLK” (Setpoint Lock) is in the left
display and “ON” in the right display for five seconds.
Press the ENTER key. “SPLK” will display along with the current setting of “ON”
or “OFF”. Use the Arrow keys to change the selection - the new selection will then
flash for five seconds. Press the ENTER key to confirm the new selection.
An event will be recorded in the DataCorder each time the action of turning it
“ON” or “OFF” is taken.
Default setting is “OFF”. Unit will default to “OFF” with the selection of PTI or a
TripStart on the unit.
Cd71 EverFRESH Mode Cd71 has three selectable modes of operation:
FRESH - All EverFRESH operations are enabled and setpoints for CO2 and O2
can be edited.
OFF - All EverFRESH operations are disabled.
PURGE - the operator has the ability to suspend EverFRESH operations while
per-charging gas levels in the container.
Cd74 Controller Diagnostic Request Test “tESt”, Displayed Test Result “PASS,” “FAIL0,” “FAIL1,” “FAIL2”
After selecting CD70, press the ENTER key while “tESt” is displayed to run the
Controller Self Diagnostic test. While the test is running, “tESt” will flash on the
display. Once the test is complete, the Test Result will be displayed. After 30
seconds, the controller returns to displaying the setpoint.
"PASS" will be the result if all power sources are present and at the correct level,
there are no input faults, and all output tests pass.
"FAIL0" will be the test result if a power source is not available or not at the
correct level.
"FAIL1" will be the test result if all power sources are present and at the correct
level, but there is an input fault.
"FAIL2" will be the test result if all power sources are present and at the correct
level, and there are no input faults, but an output test fails.

T-372 4–36
4.10 Controller Alarm Indications
There are three alarm categories:
• AL0XX Refrigeration Critical Alarms
• AL2XX Refrigeration Non-Critical Alarms
• AL9XX Atmosphere Critical and Non-Critical Alarms

AL003 Loss of Superheat Control

Cause: Superheat has remained below 1.66°C (3°F) degrees for five minutes continuously while compressor
running. Compressor drawing more than 2.0 amps, compressor pressure ratio is greater than 1.8,
and Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) is at 0% open.
Component Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
Troubleshooting Check the operation of the EEV using Cd41.
Corrective Action Replace EEV if defective.
Component Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 & ETS2)
Troubleshooting Verify accuracy of temperature sensors. See Sensor Checkout Procedure
Section 7.28.2.
Corrective Action Replace ETS1 or ETS2 if defective.
Component Evaporator Fans
Troubleshooting Confirm fans operating properly.
Corrective Action Replace fan(s) if defective. See Evaporator Fan Motor Assembly Section
7.17.

AL017 Compressor Pressure Delta Failure

Cause: Compressor has attempted to start in both directions and fails to generate sufficient pressure
differential between Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) and Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT).
Component N/A
Troubleshooting Controller will attempt to restart every 20 minutes and deactivate the alarm
if successful.
Corrective Action Resume normal operation.
Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings. See Manifold Gauge Set
Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.
Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate SPT pressure readings. See Manifold Gauge Set
Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace SPT if defective.
Component Monitor Unit
Troubleshooting Alarm is display only; the alarm may clear itself during operation.
Corrective Action If alarm remains active or is repetitive, replace compressor at next
available opportunity.

4–37 T-372
AL020 Control Fuse (F3) Open
Cause: Control power fuse (F3 or F4) is open.
Component Check F3 fuse.
Troubleshooting If fuse is open, check PA, PB, CH coils for short to ground.
Corrective Action If short is found, replace the defective coil. Replace the fuse.
Component Check F4 fuse.
Troubleshooting If fuse is open, check ESV coil resistance at CA1 to TRX2. If short to ground,
or if resistance is less than 4 ohms, coil is defective. Check CF, ES, EF, HR
coils for short to ground. If short is found, coil is defective.
Corrective Action Replace the defective coil. Replace the fuse.
Component Check voltage at QC1.
Troubleshooting If voltage not present, check ST7. If voltage is present, it indicates a
defective microprocessor.
Corrective Action See Controller Service Section 7.27.

AL021 Control Fuse (F1 / F2) Open

Cause: One of the 18 VAC controller fuses (F1 or F2) is open. Refer to Cd08.
Component System Sensors
Troubleshooting Check system sensors for short to ground.
Corrective Action Replace defective sensor(s).
Component Wiring
Troubleshooting Check wiring for short to ground.
Corrective Action Repair as needed.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Controller may have an internal short.
Corrective Action Replace controller. See Controller Service Section 7.27.

AL022 Evaporator IP Open

Cause: Evaporator motor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Evaporator Motor
Troubleshooting Shut down unit, disconnect power. Check harness between CA22 and
CA12. If open circuit, check Evaporator Motor IP at plug connection pins
4 & 6.
Corrective Action Replace defective Evaporator Fan Motor. See Evaporator Fan Motor
Service Section 7.17.

AL023 Loss of Phase B

Cause: Compressor is running and controller determines that compressor internal protector and HPs are
closed. Or, the High Speed Evaporator Fan motor is energized and internal protector is not tripped
and current reading is less than 0.5 amps.
Component Incoming Power
Troubleshooting Verify proper voltage input and proper operation of compressor contactor
and high speed evaporator contactor.
Corrective Action Replace defective component.

T-372 4–38
AL024 Compressor IP Open
Cause: Compressor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Compressor
Troubleshooting Shut down unit disconnect power and check resistance of compressor
windings at contactor T1-T2, T2-T3.
Corrective Action Monitor unit, if alarm remains active or is repetitive replace the compressor
at the next available opportunity. See Compressor Service, Section 7.9.

AL025 Condenser IP Open

Cause: Condenser fan motor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Insufficient Air Flow
Troubleshooting Shut down unit and check condenser fan for obstructions.
Corrective Action Remove obstructions.
Component Condenser Fan Motor
Troubleshooting Shut down unit, disconnect power. Check resistance at harness between
CA23 and CA11. If open, check condenser fan motor IP at plug connection
pins 4 & 6.
Corrective Action Replace defective condenser fan motor. See Condenser Fan Motor
Assembly Service, Section 7.12.

AL026 All Supply / Return Probes Failure

Cause: Sensors out of range.
Component All sensors detected as out of range.
Troubleshooting Perform pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. See
Temperature Sensor Service Section 7.28.

AL027 Analog to Digital Accuracy Failure

Cause: Controller AD converter faulty.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates a defective
microprocessor.
Corrective Action Replace defective microprocessor. See Controller Service Section 7.27.

AL028 Low Suction Pressure

Cause: Suction pressure too low for normal operation.
Component N/A
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem. Check charge. Monitor the unit.

4–39 T-372
AL028 Low Suction Pressure
Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate SPT pressure readings. See Manifold Gauge Set
Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace SPT if defective.
Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings. See Manifold Gauge Set
Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

AL072 Control Temp Out of Range

Cause: After the unit goes in-range for 30 minutes then out of range for a continuous 120 minutes.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Ensure unit is operating correctly.
Corrective Action Power cycle the unit.
Control temperature is in range.
Any pre-trip mode, resets the timers.

AL206 Keypad or Keypad Harness Fault

Cause: Controller has detected that one of the keypad keys has continuous activity.
Component Keypad or Harness
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the unit.
If the alarm reappears, replace the keypad and harness.

AL207 Fresh Air Vent Open with Frozen Setpoint

Cause: Unit has a frozen setpoint and Vent Position Sensor (VPS) is indicating that the fresh air vent is open.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting Manually reposition vent to 0% and confirm using Cd45. If Cd45 is not
reading 0%, perform a calibration of the panel.
Refer to Vent Position Sensor Service, Section 7.29.
Corrective Action If unable to obtain a zero reading, replace the defective VPS.
If unit is loaded, make sure that the vent is closed. Note and replace VPS
on next PTI.

AL208 High Compressor Pressure Ratio

Cause: Controller detects discharge pressure to suction pressure ratio is too high. The controller will attempt
to correct the situation by restarting the compressor.
Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings. Refer to Manifold Gauge Set
Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

T-372 4–40
AL214 Phase Sequence Detect Fault
Cause: Controller is unable to determine the correct phase relationship.
Component N/A
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the unit.
Component Wiring
Troubleshooting Check unit wiring.
Confirm pressure readings during start-up; suction pressure should
decrease and discharge pressure should increase.
Corrective Action Correct wiring.
Component Current Sensor
Troubleshooting Check Cd41, right most digit:
If display is 3 or 4, check compressor / sensor wiring.
If display is 5, the current sensor is defective.
Corrective Action Replace current sensor if defective.

AL218 Discharge Pressure High / Low

Cause: Discharge pressure is over the maximum for 10 minutes within the last hour.
Component Restrictions in the refrigeration system.
Troubleshooting Ensure liquid line service valve is fully open.
Corrective Action Open liquid line service valve as needed.
Component Filter Drier
Troubleshooting Check the filter drier. If it is iced up or very cold, it indicates that the filter
drier needs replacement.
Corrective Action Replace the filter drier if needed. See Filter Drier Service Section 7.14.
Component Condenser Fan
Troubleshooting Check condenser fan for proper operation.
Corrective Action Correct as required.
Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings. See Manifold Gauge Set
Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.
Component Non-condensables in the refrigeration system.
Troubleshooting With the unit off, allow system to stabilize to ambient temperature.
Check system pressure against Pressure Temperature Chart. See Table
7–4, Table 7–5.
Corrective Action Correct as required. See Refrigerant Charge Section 7.7.1.
Component Refrigerant
Troubleshooting Check refrigerant level.
Corrective Action Correct as required. See Refrigerant Charge Section 7.7.1.

4–41 T-372
AL219 Discharge Temperature High
Cause: Discharge temperature exceeds 135°C (275°F) for 10 minutes within the last hour.
Component Restrictions in the refrigeration system.
Troubleshooting Ensure the discharge service valve is fully open.
Corrective Action Open the discharge service valve as needed.
Troubleshooting Check the unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.
Component Non-condensables in the refrigeration system.
Troubleshooting With the unit off allow system to stabilize to ambient temperature.
Check system pressure against Pressure Temperature Chart. See Table
7–4, Table 7–5.
Corrective Action Correct as required. See Refrigerant Charge Section 7.7.1.
Component Additional Alarms such as AL216, AL024.
Troubleshooting Check compressor operation.
Corrective Action If the alarm persists, it may indicate a failing compressor, replace the
compressor. See Compressor Service Section 7.9.

AL250 Air Vent Position Sensor Fault

Cause: Vent Position Sensor (VPS) out of range.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting Make sure VPS is secure.
Corrective Action Manually tighten panel.
Troubleshooting If the alarm persists, replace the sensor or the assembly.
Corrective Action Replace VPS.

AL251 Data Storage Fault

Cause: Controller memory failure.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Press the ENTER key when “CLEAr” is displayed to attempt to clear the
alarm.
Corrective Action If action is successful (all alarms are inactive), alarm 251 will reset.
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates defective controller
memory.
Corrective Action Replace defective controller. See Controller Service, Section 7.27.

AL252 Alarm List Full

Cause: Alarm list queue is full.
Component Active Alarms
Troubleshooting Repair any alarms in the queue that are active. Indicated by “AA”.
Corrective Action Clear alarms. See Controller Alarms Section 4.4.

T-372 4–42
AL253 Battery Pack Fault
Cause: Any of the USDA1, USDA2, or USDA3 probes have been detected AND the Backup Battery Test
Result is Failure. Or, no Battery.
Component Battery
Troubleshooting Perform battery test in function code Cd19 to determine failure mode of
battery.
Corrective Action To clear the alarm, replace the battery pack. See Section 7.27.9 Battery
Replacement. If after replacement the alarm continues, run Cd19 to
determine whether the replaced battery is good.

AL254 Primary Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) Fault

Cause: Invalid Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) reading.
Component Supply Temperature Sensor (STS)
Troubleshooting Perform pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required. If P5 fails, replace the defective
sensor as determined by P5. See Temperature Sensor Service Section
7.28.

AL256 Primary Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) Fault

Cause: Invalid Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) reading.
Component Return Temperature Sensor (RTS)
Troubleshooting Perform pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. See
Temperature Sensor Service Section 7.28.

AL257 Ambient Sensor (AMBS) Fault

Cause: Invalid Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS) reading.
Component Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
Troubleshooting Test the AMBS. See Sensor Checkout Procedure Section 7.28.2.
Corrective Action Replace AMBS if defective. See Temperature Sensor Service Section
7.28.

AL258 Compressor High Pressure Safety Open

Cause: High pressure safety switch remains open for at least one minute.
Component High Pressure Switch (HPS)
Troubleshooting Test the HPS. See Checking High Pressure Switch, Section 7.10.1.
Corrective Action Replace HPS if defective. See Sensor Replacement, Section 7.28.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Check unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.

4–43 T-372
AL259 Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) Open
Cause: Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) is open.
Component Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT)
Troubleshooting Check resistance between CA21 and CA10. If 0 ohms, switch closed. if
infinite (OL), switch open.
Corrective Action Replace HTT if defective. See Sensor Replacement Section 7.28.

AL260 Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) Fault

Cause: Failure of the Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) to open.
Component Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS)
Troubleshooting Test the DTS; refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure Section 7.28.2.
Corrective Action Replace the DTS if defective. See Sensor Replacement Section 7.28.

AL261 Improper Heater Current Fault

Cause: Improper current draw during heat or defrost mode.
Component Heater(s)
Troubleshooting While in heat or defrost mode, check for proper current draw at heater
contactors. See Electrical Data, Section 3.3.
Corrective Action Replace heater(s) if defective. See Evaporator Heater Removal and
Replacement Section 7.16.
Component Contactor
Troubleshooting Check voltage at heater contactor on the heater side.
Corrective Action If no voltage present, replace heater contactor if defective.

AL263 Exceed Current Limit Setting

Cause: Unit operating above current limit.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Check unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.
Troubleshooting Check unit for proper operation.
Corrective Action Repair as needed.
Component Power supply
Troubleshooting Confirm supply voltage / frequency is within specification and balanced
according to Electrical Data Section 3.3.
Corrective Action Correct power supply.
Component Current limit set too low
Troubleshooting Check current limit setting with function code Cd32.
Corrective Action The current limit can be raised (maximum of 23 amps) using Cd32.

AL264 Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS) Fault

Cause: Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS) out of range.
Component Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS).

T-372 4–44
AL264 Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS) Fault
Troubleshooting Test the CPDS. See Sensor Checkout Procedure, Section 7.28.2.
Corrective Action Replace the CPDS if defective. See Sensor Replacement Section 7.28.

AL265 Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) Fault

Cause: Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) is out of range.
Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings. See Manifold Gauge Set
Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

AL266 Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT), Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT) Fault
Cause: Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) or Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT) out of range.
Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT); Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate SPT and EPT pressure readings. See Manifold Gauge
Set Section 7.2. Performing a pre-trip 5-9 test will also check the
transducers.
Corrective Action Replace SPT / EPT if defective.
Troubleshooting Monitor
Corrective Action If the alarm persists, it may indicate a failing compressor. See Compressor
Service Section 7.9.

AL267 Humidity Sensor (HS) Fault

Cause: Humidity Sensor (HS) reading out of range.
Component Humidity Sensor (HS)
Troubleshooting Make sure the HS is properly connected in the socket. Make sure the HS
wires have not been damaged.
Corrective Action Monitor, replace HS if alarm persists.

AL269 Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 / ETS2) Fault

Cause: Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 / ETS2) out of range.
Component Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 / ETS2)
Troubleshooting Test the sensors. See Sensor Checkout Procedure Section 7.28.2.
Corrective Action Replace Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 / ETS2) if defective.

AL270 Supply Recorder Sensor (SRS) Fault

Cause: Supply Recorder Sensor (SRS) is out of range.
Component Supply Recorder Sensor (SRS)
Troubleshooting Perform pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required. If P5 fails, replace the defective
sensor as determined by P5. See Temperature Sensor Service Section
7.28.

4–45 T-372
AL271 Return Recorder Sensor (RRS) Fault
Cause: Return Recorder Sensor (RRS) is out of range.
Component Return Recorder Sensor (RRS)
Troubleshooting Perform pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required. If P5 fails, replace the defective
sensor as determined by P5. See Temperature Sensor Service Section
7.28.

AL272 USDA Temp 1 Out of Range

Cause: USDA Temp 1 Sensor is out of range.
Component Sensor
Troubleshooting Validate sensor values by following the Sensor checkout procedure. See
Section 7.28.
Corrective Action If the sensor is bad, replace. If not, verify the harness wiring and
connections to the controller.

AL273 USDA Temp 2 Out of Range

Cause: USDA Temp 2 Sensor is out of range.
Component Sensor
Troubleshooting Validate sensor values by following the Sensor checkout procedure. See
Section 7.28.
Corrective Action If the sensor is bad, replace. If not, verify the harness wiring and
connections to the controller.

AL274 USDA Temp 3 Out of Range

Cause: USDA Temp 3 Sensor is out of range.
Component Sensor
Troubleshooting Validate sensor values by following the Sensor checkout procedure. See
Section 7.28.
Corrective Action If the sensor is bad, replace. If not, verify the harness wiring and
connections to the controller.

AL275 Cargo Probe 4 Out of Range

Cause: Cargo Probe 4 Sensor is out of range.
Component Sensor
Troubleshooting Validate sensor values by following the Sensor checkout procedure. See
Section 7.28.
Corrective Action If the sensor is bad, replace. If not, verify the harness wiring and
connections to the controller.

AL286 RTC Battery Low

Cause: RTC Battery output low.
Component RTC Battery
Troubleshooting Power cycle unit and monitor 24 hours to verify alarm goes inactive.

T-372 4–46
AL286 RTC Battery Low
Corrective Action If alarm stays active, replace battery.

AL287 RTC Fault

Cause: RTC time invalid.
Component Real Time Clock
Troubleshooting Power cycle. Reset clock. Verify it maintains correct time.
Corrective Action Replace RTC Battery. Retest.

AL289 Data Storage Fault

Cause: Unable to store data in DataCorder.
Component DataCorder
Troubleshooting Power cycle and verify that the alarm goes inactive.
Corrective Action If alarm stays active, replace the controller.

AL907 Manual Fresh Air Vent Open

Cause: For units equipped with EverFRESH and a Vent Position Sensor, the controller will monitor the
manual fresh air opening at a pre-determined time. If during this time the fresh air vent is open and
EverFRESH is active, an alarm will be generated. If an alarm is active, the controller monitors the
manual fresh air once per hour. Upon clearing the alarm, the controller goes back to monitoring at
the pre-determined time.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting Manually reposition vent to 0% and confirm using Cd45. If Cd45 is not
reading 0%, perform a calibration of the panel. See Section 7.29 for Vent
Position Sensor service procedures.
Corrective Action If unable to obtain a zero reading, replace the defective VPS.
If unit is loaded, ensure vent is closed. Note and replace VPS on next PTI.
The alarm will not affect the EverFRESH system from operating.

AL909 Oxygen Sensor (O2) Fault

Cause: Triggered anytime the O2 sensor reading is outside of the normal operation range, after an initial
signal was detected.
Action: Control CO2 by running the EverFRESH Air Compressor (EAC) and opening the EverFRESH Air
Valve (EA). Controlling CO2 via the EA will also prevent low O2 and cargo loss. If both AL909 and
AL910 are active, run the EAC and open the EA.
Component O2 Sensor, O2 Amplifier
Troubleshooting Check Cd44 and scroll down to 02V. The O2 sensor output will be
displayed in millivolts (130mV to 4100mV is a good range).
Check wiring (refer to schematic), and check for bad connections or wires
improperly positioned.
If O2 sensor is available, remove the upper fresh air panel and evaporator
motor and replace the sensor. If after replacing the sensor Cd44 reads
outside of the normal range and AL909 continues, replace the amplifier.
If parts are not available, turn the EverFRESH option off via Cd71 and
open the manual fresh air vent.

4–47 T-372
AL910 Carbon Dioxide Sensor (CO2) Fault
Cause: Triggered anytime the CO2 sensor reading is outside of the normal operation range, after an initial
signal was detected.
Action: Control O2 to setpoint. Controlling O2 may allow CO2 to increase. Replace sensor as soon as
possible. If both AL909 and AL910 are active, run the EverFRESH Air Compressor (EAC) and open
the EverFRESH Air Valve (EA).
Component CO2 Sensor
Troubleshooting Check wiring (refer to schematic), and check for bad connections or wires
improperly positioned.
Check the voltage on the back of MD connectors pin MD09 (-) and MD03
(+12 VDC) with the controller energized. If 12 VDC is not available, check
the controller. If 12 VDC is available, check the back of pin MD02 for a
voltage between 1.0 - 4.7 VDC. If not present, replace the sensor.
If part is available, remove the upper fresh air panel and evaporator motor
and replace the sensor. If no part is available, take no action and service
at next PTI.

AL929 Loss of Atmospheric Control

Cause: Triggered whenever the CO2 level is above its upper limit by 1% for 45 minutes. Or, when the O2 level
is greater than 1% below its setpoint for longer than 30 minutes after the unit has been in range. The
alarm is triggered off when the levels return to within the normal range.
Action: Enable Alarm LED. Open the fresh air vent and air compressor is enabled.
Setup Verify all EverFRESH components are functioning properly by checking
for EverFRESH alarms and running a P-20 PreTrip.
Troubleshooting If a component is not functioning properly, it will fail the appropriate P-20
sub test. Note components in order below.
Component Membrane Pressure Transducer (MPT)
Troubleshooting Remove the MPT. Turn on the container unit. Using Cd44, verify the MPT
pressure reads between -5 and +5 psig. Outside this range or if AL977
active, replace the sensor.
Component EverFRESH Air Compressor (EAC)
Troubleshooting Verify EAC fuses FEF1, FEF2 & FEF3.
Check P20 results for a failure mode:
• Possible detected failure with EAC current consumption, check
compressor motor windings, and verify voltage on all 3 phases.
• MPT failure. Follow steps above.
• Failure of AC contactor for EAC. Ohm contactor coil and check
resistance across contactor legs, with power removed.
Component EverFRESH Air Valve (EA)
Troubleshooting A closed or plugged EA solenoid could prevent fresh air from entering the
container. P20-2 tests the valve.
Potential failure results:
• MPT pressure fails to change when the valve is energized. Check
for signs of blockage in the valve or piping.
• EA current is not correct. Access function code Cd74 and perform
a ML5 self-check to verify the controller is functioning properly. If it
passes, perform a ohm check on the back of CA08 pin and TRX2
(ground) using the carrier service tool (part # 22-50485-00).

T-372 4–48
AL929 Loss of Atmospheric Control
Component Water Drain Valve (WDV)
Troubleshooting A closed or plugged WDV or filter housing could prevent any air from
entering the container. P20-3 tests valve operation.
Potential failure results:
• MPT pressure fails to change when the valve is energized. Check
for signs of blockage by removing the WDV housing and particu-
late filter housings. Clean any debris. While removed, inspect the
WDV and associated piping for blockage.
• EA current not correct. Access function code Cd74 and perform a
ML5 self-check to verify the controller is functioning properly. If it
fails, replace the controller. If it passes self-check, replace the WDV.
Component EverFRESH Nitrogen Valve (EN)
Troubleshooting An open or leaky EN valve would allow N2 to go into the sensor sensing
chamber causing an inaccurate reading. P20-5 tests this valve.
Potential failure results:
• If tests fail, remove the EN and verify the valve is not clogged or
damaged.
• EA current is not correct. Access function code Cd74 and perform
a ML5 self-check to verify the controller is functioning properly. If it
fails, replace the controller. If it passes self-check, replace the EN.

AL962 Oxygen (O2) Out of Range

Cause: This is a notification alarm and does not pose a risk to fresh produce, however the benefit of
atmosphere control will not be lost. O2 level reaches pulldown limit and then O2 exceeds 5% over
setpoint for 30 minutes.
Component Upper Fresh Air Panel
Troubleshooting Verify the Upper Fresh Air Panel has not been opened.
Component EverFRESH Air Valve (EA)
Troubleshooting An EA that is stuck open can allow continuous flow of fresh air into the
container when the compressor is on. See troubleshooting in the AL929
section.
Component Container Air Tightness
Troubleshooting Seal container where possible (access panels, rear doors, mounting
hardware, etc).

AL976 Air Compressor Internal Protector Open

Cause: EverFRESH Air Compressor (EAC) internal protector opens.
Component EverFRESH Air Compressor (EAC)
Troubleshooting Follow steps defined in AL929 EAC testing.
Component ML5 Controller
Troubleshooting Access function code Cd74 to perform an ML5 self-diagnostic test.

4–49 T-372
AL977 Membrane Pressure Transducer (MPT) Fault
Cause: When the EverFRESH Air Compressor (EAC) is running and pressure is not between -5 psig and
200 psig or the EAC has been OFF for five minutes and pressure is not within the range of -5 psig
and 5 psig.
Component Membrane Pressure Transducer (MPT)
Troubleshooting With the EverFRESH system off for 15 minutes, bring up function code
Cd44 and scroll to "EF Pt". Verify that the value is between -5 psig and 5
psig. A "- - - - " value indicates a failed sensor or harness. Pressure outside
of range indicates a bad sensor, replace the sensor.
Component ML5 Controller
Troubleshooting Access function code Cd74 to perform an ML5 self-diagnostic test.

AL978 Air Compressor Pressure Low

Cause: EverFRESH Air Compressor (EAC) engaged and Fresh Air Vent (FAV) and Water Drain Valve
(WDV) are closed and compressor has been running for longer than 20 seconds and Membrane
Pressure Transducer (MPT) Pressure < 75 psig.
Component Membrane Pressure Transducer (MPT)
Troubleshooting With the EverFRESH system off for 15 minutes, bring up function code
Cd44 and scroll to "EF Pt". Verify that the value is between -5 psig and 5
psig. A "- - - - " value indicates a failed sensor or harness. Pressure outside
of range indicates a bad sensor, replace the sensor.
Component System Plumbing
Troubleshooting Inspect plumbing, hoses, fittings, check valve, and orifices for signs of
leakage. Repair as required.
With the compressor running, spray the pressure relief valve with soapy
water. Replace if leaking. If a spare pressure relief valve is not available,
try opening and closing the valve with an O-Ring on the valve to try and
re-seat.
See the condition for Membrane Pressure Transducer (MPT) Reading
Low in the EverFRESH manual.

AL979 Air Compressor Pressure High

Cause: EverFRESH Air Compressor (EAC) engaged and Pressure > 135 psig.
Component Membrane Pressure Transducer (MPT)
Troubleshooting With the EverFRESH system off for 15 minutes, bring up function code
Cd44 and scroll to "EF Pt". Verify that the value is between -5 psig and 5
psig. A "- - - - " value indicates a failed sensor or harness. Pressure outside
of range indicates a bad sensor, replace the sensor.
Component System Plumbing
Troubleshooting Inspect plumbing, hoses, fittings, check valve, and orifices for signs of
blockage. Repair as required.
See the condition for Membrane Pressure Transducer (MPT) Reading
High in the EverFRESH manual.

T-372 4–50
AL980 Fresh Air Valve (EA) Fault
Cause: When the system energizes the EverFRESH Air Valve (EA) solenoid and membrane pressure does
not drop 40 psi, the alarm is triggered. The alarm triggers OFF when membrane pressure transducer
(MPT) pressure drop is more than 40 psi when EA is opened.
Component EverFRESH Air Valve (EA) Solenoid
Troubleshooting Run a P20 test to verify mechanical and electrical performance of the
solenoid.
If the electrical test fails, replace the valve.
If the mechanical test fails, check for obstructions blocking system flow.
Remove obstructions. If it still fails, replace the valve.
Component ML5 Controller
Troubleshooting Access function code Cd74 to perform an ML5 self-diagnostic test.

AL981 Water Drain Valve (WDV) Fault

Cause: When the system energizes the Water Drain Valve (WDV) and membrane pressure does not drop
40 psi, the alarm is triggered. The alarm triggers OFF when membrane pressure transducer (MPT)
pressure drop is more than 40 psi when the EverFRESH Air Valve (EA) is opened.
Component Water Drain Valve (WDV)
Troubleshooting Inspect WDV bowl and outlet piping for obstructions, clean components.
Run P20 test to verify mechanical and electrical performance of solenoid.
If the electrical test fails, replace the valve.
If the mechanical test fails, check for obstructions blocking system flow.
Remove obstructions. If it still fails, replace the valve.
Component ML5 Controller
Troubleshooting Access function code Cd74 to perform an ML5 self-diagnostic test.

AL982 CO2 Injection Failure

Cause: If unit is configured with the CO2 injection option, this alarm is triggered when Cd71 is set to “On” to
enable CO2 injection and CO2 is less than the CO2 setpoint by 0.5% and IPT < 20 PSIG.
Component CO2 Supply
Troubleshooting Verify CO 2 supply is available and supplied at the recommended
pressure.
Component CO2 Injection Port Schrader Valve
Troubleshooting If proper pressure is available at the CO2 injection supply port, verify that
the Schrader valve is being depressed by the supply hose properly to
allow flow.
Component CO2 Injection Solenoid
Troubleshooting Run a P20 test to evaluate the solenoid and replace if test fails.

AL983 CO2 Injection Pressure Transducer Failure

Cause: If unit is equipped with the CO2 injection option, this alarm is triggered when Cd71 is set to “On” to
enable CO2 injection and volts are not in the range of 0.5 to 4.95 VDC.
Component CO2 Injection Pressure Transducer (IPT)
Troubleshooting From function code Cd74, run a controller self-diagnostic test. Evaluate
results to see if there is a controller or transducer issue. If there is a
sensor issue, or the test passes, change the transducer.

4–51 T-372
AL996 Scrubber Rotation Fault
Cause: Feedback from the Scrubber Motor to the controller is not sensed when the motor is turning.
Component Scrubber Fuse
Troubleshooting Check to see if Scrubber Fuse is blown. Replace Fuse if necessary.
Component Scrubber Motor
Troubleshooting Run Test Mode and verify scrubber bed is turning. If back panel cannot be
removed to check, verify the scrubber amperage consumption, read at XS
contactor wire XSL1. If between 40 and 200mA, motor is rotating properly.
If no current detected, check and replace FX3. If current spiking to 350mA
for 2 seconds then dropping to 90mA, the scrubber motor is located. If
scrubber motor is locked, further inspection of the scrubber bed is
required. Unit will control CO2 with the fresh air solenoid when this alarm
occurs if scrubber inaccessible.
If Scrubber Motor not operating, follow the troubleshooting flowchart in
XtendFresh manual and take appropriate action.

ERR# Internal Microprocessor Failure

Cause: The controller performs self-check routines. If an internal failure occurs, an “ERR” alarm will appear
on the display. This is an indication the controller needs to be replaced.
Error Description
ERR 0-RAM failure Indicates that the controller working memory has failed.
ERR 1-Program Memory Indicates a problem with the controller program.
Failure
ERR 2-Watchdog time- The controller program has entered a mode whereby the controller
out program has stopped executing.
ERR 3-N/A N/A
ERR 4-N/A N/A
ERR 5-A-D failure The controller’s Analog to Digital (A-D) converter has failed.
ERR 6-IO Board failure Internal program/update failure.
ERR 7-Controller failure Internal version/firmware incompatible.
ERR 8-DataCORDER Internal DataCORDER memory failure.
failure
ERR 9-Controller failure Internal controller memory failure.

Entr StPt Enter Set point (Press Arrow & Enter)

Cause: The controller is prompting the operator to enter a setpoint.

LO Low Main Voltage (Function Codes Cd27-38 disabled and No alarm stored.)
Cause: This message will be alternately displayed with the setpoint whenever the supply voltage is less than
75% of its proper value.

T-372 4–52
4.11 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes
Table 4–9 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes
NOTE:
“Auto” or “Auto1” menu includes the: P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6 and rSLts. “Auto2” menu includes P0, P1, P2, P3,
P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10 and rSLts. “Auto3” menu includes P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7 and P8.
P0-0 Pre-Trip Initiated: Container identifier code, Cd18 Software Revision Number, Cd20
Configuration Display, Container Unit Model Number, & configuration database identifier
Indicator Lamps, LEDs, and CFMMYYDD are displayed in sequence.
Displays Next the unit will indicate the presence or non-presence of an RMU
according to whether any RMU inquiry messages have been received
since the unit was booted.
Units equipped with Autoslide Enabled (Cnf44) will cause the vent to seek
to its closed position, followed by two sequences of opening to 100% and
returning to the closed position. No other autoslide mode of operation will
be available until the two cycles of opening and closing have completed.
Since the system cannot recognize lights and display failures, there are no
test codes or results associated with this phase of pre-trip. To know if the
test passes the operator must observe that the LCD display elements and
the indicator lights behave as described below.
P1 Tests - Heaters Current Draw: Heater is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified
range. No other system components will change state during this test.
P1-0 Heaters Turned On Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the
heater is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured again.
The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.
P1-1 Heaters Turned Off Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the
heater is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured again.
The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.
P2 Tests - Condenser Fan Current Draw: Condenser fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall
within specified range. No other system components will change state during this test. If the Water Pres-
sure Switch is open this test will be skipped.
P2-0 Condenser Fan On Condenser fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and
condenser fan is then turned on. After 15 seconds the current draw is
measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P2-1 Condenser Fan Off Condenser fan is then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw is
measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P3 Tests - Low Speed Evaporator Fan Current Draw: The system must be equipped with a low speed
evaporator fan, as determined by CnF02, the Evaporator Fan Speed Select configuration variable. Low
speed evaporator fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range. No other sys-
tem components will change state during this test.
P3-0 Low Speed Evaporator Fan High speed evaporator fans will be turned on for 20 seconds, the fans will
Motors On be turned off for 4 seconds, current draw is measured, and then the low
speed evaporator fans are turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw is
measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P3-1 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Low speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the
Motors Off current draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.

4–53 T-372
 Table 4–9 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Continued)
P4 Tests - High Speed Evaporator Fans Current Draw: High speed evaporator fans are turned on,
then off. Current draw must fall within specified range and measured current changes must exceed spec-
ified ratios. No other system components will change state during this test.
NOTE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the start of
either test, then the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test, then the
test will fail upon conclusion of the test.
P4-0 High Speed Evaporator Fan Evaporator fans start in the off condition, current draw is measured, then
Motors On high speed evaporator fans will be turned on. After 60 seconds the current
draw is measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw in the specified range AND
measured current changes exceed specified ratios.
If the three phase motors are configured IN, the change ratio test is
skipped.
P4-1 High Speed Evaporator Fan High speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the
Motors Off current draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P5 Tests - Air Stream Temperature Sensor Tests: Tests the validity of the Air Stream Temperature Sensors.
P5-0 Supply/Return Probe Test The High Speed Evaporator Fan is turned on and run for eight minutes,
with all other outputs de-energized. A temperature comparison is made
between the return and supply probes.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-0” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe
tests (this test and the PRIMARY/SECONDARY) pass, display
will read “P5” “PASS.”
P5-1 Supply Probe Test This test if for units equipped with secondary supply probe only.
The temperature difference between primary supply probe and secondary
supply probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-1” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe
tests (this and the SUPPLY/RETURN TEST) pass, because of
the multiple tests, the display will read “P5” “PASS.”
P5-2 Return Probe Test For units equipped with secondary return probe only.
The temperature difference between return temperature sensor (RTS) and
return temperature sensor (RRS) probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
NOTES
1. If this test fails, “P5-2” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both
Probe tests (this test and the SUPPLY/RETURN) pass, because
of the multiple tests, the display will read “P 5,” “PASS.”
2. The results of pre-trip tests 5-0, 5-1 and 5-2 will be used to
activate or clear control probe alarms.

T-372 4–54
 Table 4–9 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Continued)
P5-3 Evaporator Fan Direction Test With evaporator fan running on high speed, measure the temperature
difference between the primary supply and primary return probes. Turn the
heaters on for 60 seconds then measure the temperature difference
between the primary supply and primary return probes for up to 120
additional seconds.
This is a Pass/Fail test. The test passes if differential of STS is 0.25°C
higher than RTS.
Test P5-0 must pass before this test is run.
P5-7 Primary vs. Secondary This is a Pass/Fail test of the primary evaporator temperature sensor
Evaporator Temperature (ETS1) and secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2).
Sensor Test Test passes if secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2) is within
+/- 0.5°C of the primary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS1).
P5-8 Future Expansion This is no longer active and will be displayed as “-----” at this time.
P5-9 Suction (Evaporator) Units equipped with a secondary Evaporator pressure transducer.
Pressure Transducer Test Test passes if suction pressure transducer (SPT) is within +/- 1.5 psi of the
evaporator pressure transducer (EPT).
Test P5-8 must pass before this test is run.
P5-10 Humidity Sensor Controller This is a Pass / Fail / Skip test of the humidity sensor configuration.
Configuration Verification Test passes if the controller configuration has humidity sensor in.
Test
Test fails if the controller configuration has humidity sensor out and Vout
is greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test is skipped if the controller configuration has the humidity sensor out
and Vout is less than 0.20 Volts.
Test P5-9 must pass before this test is run.
P5-11 Humidity Sensor Installation This is a Pass/Fail test of humidity sensor installation (sensor is present).
Verification Test Test passes if Vout is greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test fails if Vout is less than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test P5-10 must pass before this test is run.
P5-12 Humidity Sensor Range This is a Pass/Fail test of the Humidity Sensor Range.
Check Test Test passes if Vout for humidity sensor is between 0.33 and 4 Volts.
Test fails if Vout is outside of this range.
Test P5-11 must pass before this test is run.
P6 Tests - Refrigerant Probes, Compressor and Refrigerant Valves: Pass/Fail testing is performed
for the compressor, EEV, DUV, LIV (if equipped), ESV, and the refrigerant pressure and temperature sen-
sors.
P6-0 Discharge Thermistor Test If Alarm 64 is active the test fails. Otherwise, the test passes.
P6-1 Suction Thermistor Test If the Suction Temperature Sensor (CPSS) both is configured ON and is
invalid, the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
P6-2 Discharge Pressure If Alarm 65 is active any time during the first 45 second period, the test
Transducer Test fails. Otherwise, the test passes.
P6-3 Suction Pressure Transducer If Alarm 66 is active the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
Test
P6-4 Compressor Current Draw Compressor current is tested before and 10 seconds after start up. If
Test current does not increase, the test fails. P6-7 is run at the end of P6-4. If
this test fails, P6-6 is skipped.

4–55 T-372
 Table 4–9 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Continued)
P6-5 Compressor Leak Test Pre-trip P6-5 ensures that the compressor holds pressure. After
compressor pump up and pump down, the compressor is turned off for 62
seconds. When suction side pressure holds (less than 8 psi rise) for 10
seconds, P6-5 passes, otherwise the Compressor Leak Test fails.
See the July 2017 issue of TechLine for a procedure to assist the
technician in troubleshooting a P6-5 occurrence.
NOTE
P6-6 through P6-10 are conducted by changing status of each valve and comparing suction pressure
change and/or compressor current change with predetermined values. Tests will cause compressor and
condenser fans to cycle on and off as needed to generate the pressure required for individual pre-trip sub
tests. The compressor will start in order to build discharge pressure, followed by compressor pump down
sequence. At the conclusion of compressor pump down sequence, the compressor will shut down and
the valve test will start.
P6-6 Economizer Valve Test Passes if suction pressure increases a minimum of 4 psia when the valve
opens for 15 seconds.
P6-7 Digital Unloader Valve Test Passes if pressure and current changes are within 3 seconds of DUV
switch signal and either the pressure change or the current draw change
is above 5 psi or above 1.5A, respectively.
P6-9 Liquid Injection Valve Test (If equipped) Test passes if change of suction pressure is greater than 4
psia when the valve opens for 10 seconds. Otherwise, it fails.
P6-10 Electronic Expansion Valve The test records the suction pressure during the open valve position and
Test passes if the suction pressure increase is above 3 psi when the valve
opens for 10 seconds.
NOTE
P7-0 & P8 are included with “Auto 2 & Auto 3” only. P9-0 through P10 are included with “Auto2” only.
P7 Tests - High Pressure Tests: Unit is run at full capacity without condenser fan running to make sure
that the HPS opens and closes properly.
P7-0 High Pressure Switch (HPS) Test is skipped if sensed ambient temperature is less than 7.2°C (45°F),
Opening Test return air temperature is less than -17.8°C (0°F), or the water pressure
switch is open.
With the unit running, the condenser fan is turned off and a 900 second
(15 minute) timer is started. The right display shows Discharge Pressure
if the sensor is configured and valid, else Discharge Temperature. The unit
needs to disable Discharge Pressure limit and enable Current Limit
checks.
The test fails immediately if:
-Ambient Temperature Sensor invalid
-Composite Return Temperature Sensor invalid
-HPS is open
The test fails if:
-HPS fails to open before 900 seconds total test time.
-Evaporator or Compressor IP Alarm.
-Calculated Dome Temperature exceeds 137.78°C (280°F).
-Discharge pressure exceeds 370 psig.
-Compressor Current exceeds limits
The test passes if HPS opens within the 15 minute time limit.

T-372 4–56
 Table 4–9 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Continued)
P7-1 High Pressure Switch (HPS) If return temperature greater than -2.4°C, set setpoint to -5.0°C, else set
Closing Test setpoint to -30°C. Restart unit according to normal startup logic. Run unit
normally for 120 seconds.
The test passes if the high pressure switch closes within 75 seconds after
end of Test 7-0, else the test fails.
Test P7-0 must pass for this test to execute.
P8 Tests - Perishable Mode Tests: Pre-trip tests P7-0 and P7-1 must have passed or have been
skipped for these tests to execute.
P8-0 Perishable Mode Test If the control temperature is below 15.6°C, the setpoint is changed to
15.6°C, and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed
in the equivalent of normal heating. If the control temperature is above
15.6°C. at the start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test
8-1. While in test 8-0 the right display will show the value of the control
temperature.
The test fails if the 180 Minute timer expires before the control temperature
reaches setpoint - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat. There is no
pass display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches setpoint,
the test proceeds to test 8-1.
P8-1 Perishable Mode Pull Down Control temperature must be at least 15.6°C (60°F).
Test / eAutoFresh CO2 The setpoint is changed to 0°C (32°F), and a 180-minute timer is started.
Sensor Calibration The left display will read “P8-1,” the right display will show the supply air
temperature. The unit will then start to pull down the temperature to the
0°C setpoint.
The test passes if the container temperature reaches setpoint before the
180-minute timer expires.
On units where the CO2 Sensor Status indicates that a CO2 sensor is
present, calibration of the CO2 sensor will be attempted during P8-1. Once
P8-1 begins, calibration will be attempted when the supply temperature
goes below 5°C. If the CO2 sensor voltage reads within the 0.95
<>1.15Vdc range before the end of P8-1, the sensor will be calibrated by
holding the CO2 zero line low for 4 seconds. Once calibration is performed,
the sensor voltage will be verified to make sure it is in the 0.95 to 1.05 Vdc
range. If the voltage is not within this range, CO2 sensor calibration fails.
P8-2 Perishable Mode Maintain Test P8-1 must pass for P8-2 to execute.
Temperature Test A fifteen minute timer is started, and the system will attempt to minimize
control temperature error (supply temperature minus setpoint) until the
timer expires. The control temperature will be sampled each minute
starting at the beginning of P8-2.
During P8-2, the left display will read “P8-2,” and the right display will show
the supply air temperature.
When the test is completed, the average control temperature error will be
compared to the pass/fail criteria.
Test passes if the average temperature error is within +/- 1.0°C.
Test fails if the average temperature error is greater than +/- 1.0°C, or if
the DataCORDER supply temperature probe is invalid. If the test fails, the
control probe temperature will be recorded as -50.0°C.
P9 Test - DTT Close and Open Test: The DTT in this control is not a physical device, with actual metallic
contacts, it is a software function that acts similar to a thermostat. Using various temperature inputs, the
DTT function determines whether a thermostat mounted on the Evaporator Coil would have OPEN or
CLOSED contacts. Primarily, the DTT function operates based on the temperature reading from the
Defrost Termination Sensor.

4–57 T-372
 Table 4–9 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Continued)
P9-0 DTT Closed and Open Test During P9-0 the defrost temperature sensor (DTS) reading will be
displayed on the left display. The right display will show the supply air
temperature.
The unit will run FULL COOL for 30 minutes maximum until the DTT is
considered closed. This step may not have to be executed. Once the DTT
is considered closed, the unit simulates defrost by running the heaters for
up to two hours, or until the DTT is considered open.
Test fails if:
The DTT is not considered closed after the 30 minutes of full
cooling.
HTT opens when DTT is considered closed or if return air tem-
perature rises above 48°C (120°F).
Test passes if the DTT is considered open within the 2 hour heat cycle
time limit.
P10 Tests - Frozen Mode Tests:
P10-0 Frozen Mode Heat Test If the container temperature is below 7.2°C, the setpoint is changed to
7.2°C, and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed in
the equivalent of normal heating. If the container temperature is above
7.2°C. at the start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test
10-1. During this test, the control temperature will be shown on the right
display.
The test fails if the 180 Minute timer expires before the control temperature
reaches setpoint - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat. There is no
pass display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches setpoint,
the test proceeds to test 10-1.
P10-1 Frozen Mode Pulldown Test Control temperature must be at least 7.2°C (45°F)
The setpoint is changed to -17.8°C. The system will then attempt to pull
down the control temperature to setpoint using normal frozen mode
cooling. During this test, the control temperature will be shown on the right
display.
The test passes if the control temperature reaches setpoint minus 0.3°C
before the 180 minute timer expires. Otherwise, the test fails. Upon failure
and when initiated by an automatic pre-trip sequence, P10-1 will auto-
repeat once by starting P10-0 over again.
P10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain Test P10-1 must pass for this test to execute.
Temperature Test Same as for test 8-2 except the control temperature is the return probe
temperature.
The average error must be +/-1.6°C. If the DataCORDER supply
temperature probe is invalid, the test fails and the control probe
temperature will be recorded as -50°C. Upon failure and when initiated by
an automatic pre-trip sequence, P10-2 will auto-repeat by starting P10-0
over again.
 Table 4–10 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records
Test Title Data
1-0 Heater On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in current for Phase A, B and C
1-1 Heater Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-0 Condenser Fan On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Water pressure switch (WPS) - Open / Closed,
Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-1 Condenser Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-0 Low Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-1 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-0 High Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-1 High Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
5-0 Supply / Return Probe Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, RTS, SRS and RRS
5-1 Secondary Supply Probe (SRS) Pass / Fail / Skip
Test
5-2 Secondary Return Probe (RRS) Pass / Fail / Skip
Test
5-3 Evaporator Fan Direction Test Pass / Fail / Skip
5-7 Primary vs. Secondary Pass / Fail / Skip
Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Test
5-8 Future Expansion “-----”
5-9 Primary vs. Secondary Pass / Fail / Skip
Evaporator Pressure
Transducer Test
5-10 Humidity Sensor Controller Pass / Fail / Skip
Configuration Verification Test
5-11 Humidity Sensor Installation Pass / Fail / Skip
Verification Test
5-12 Humidity Sensor Range Check Pass / Fail / Skip
Test
6-0 Discharge Thermistor Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-1 Suction Thermistor Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-2 Discharge Pressure Transducer Pass / Fail / Skip
Test
6-3 Suction Pressure Transducer Pass / Fail / Skip
Test
6-4 Compressor Current Draw Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-5 Compressor Leak Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-6 Economizer Valve Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-7 Digital Unloader Valve Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-9 Liquid Injection Valve Test (If Pass / Fail / Skip
equipped)
6-10 Electronic Expansion Valve Pass / Fail / Skip
Test
7-0 High Pressure Switch Closed Pass / Fail / Skip Result, AMBS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
Input values that component opens

4–59 T-372
 Table 4–10 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records (Continued)
Test Title Data
7-1 High Pressure Switch Open Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
Input values that component closes
8-0 Perishable Mode Heat Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time it takes to heat to 16°C (60°F)
8-1 Perishable Mode Pulldown Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time it takes to pull down to 0°C (32°F)
8-2 Perishable Mode Maintain Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER supply temperature
(SRS) over last recording interval.
9-0 Defrost Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, DTS reading at end of test, line voltage, line
frequency, time in defrost.
10-0 Frozen Mode Heat Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time unit is in heat.
10-1 Frozen Mode Pulldown Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time to pull down unit to -17.8°C (0°F).
10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER return temperature
(RRS) over last recording interval.

T-372 4–60
 SECTION 5
OPERATION

5.1 Inspection

! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compress or unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.

1. Check inside the unit for the following conditions:

• Check channels or “T” bar floor for cleanliness. Channels must be free of debris for proper air circulation.
• Check container panels, insulation and door seals for damage. Perform permanent or temporary repairs.
• Check visually that the evaporator fan motor mounting bolts are properly secured (refer to Section 7.17).
• Check for visible corrosion on the evaporator stator and fan deck (refer to Section 7.18).
• Check for dirt or grease on evaporator fans or fan deck and clean if necessary (refer to Section 7.18).
• Check evaporator coil for cleanliness or obstructions. Wash with fresh water (refer to Section 7.18).
• Check defrost drain pans and drain lines for obstructions and clear if necessary. Wash with fresh water.
• Check panels on refrigeration unit for loose bolts and condition of panels. Make sure T.I.R. devices are in
place on access panels.
2. Check condenser coil for cleanliness. Wash with fresh water (refer to Section 7.11).
3. Open the control box door. Check for loose electrical connections or hardware.
4. Check color of moisture-liquid indicator.

5.2 Connect Power

! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF the Start-Stop switch (ST), unit cir-
cuit breaker(s) and external power source.

! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.

5.2.1 Connecting to 380/460 VAC Power

1. Make sure the Start-Stop switch (ST), located on the control panel, is in “0” position (Off).
2. Make sure circuit breaker CB-1, located in the control box, is in “0” position (Off).
3. Plug the 460 VAC (yellow) cable into a de-energized 380/460 VAC, 3-phase power source and energize the
power source.
4. Place circuit breaker CB-1 in “I” position (On).
5. Close and secure the control box door.

5.2.2 Connecting to 190/230 VAC Power

To allow unit operation on nominal 230 volt power, an autotransformer (see Figure 5.1) is required. The autotrans-
former is fitted with a 230 VAC cable and a receptacle to accept the standard 460 VAC power plug. The 230 volt
cable is black in color while the 460 volt cable is yellow. The transformer may also be equipped with a circuit
breaker (CB-2). The transformer is a step-up transformer that provides 380/460 VAC, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz power to
the unit when the 230 VAC power cable is connected to a 190/230 VAC, 3-phase power source.

5–1 T-372
PROCEDURE:
1. Make sure the Start-Stop switch (ST), located on the control panel, is in “0” position (Off).
2. Make sure circuit breaker CB-1, located in the control box, and CB-2, located on the transformer, are both in
“0” position (Off).
3. Plug in and lock the 460 VAC power plug at the receptacle on the transformer.
4. Plug the 230 VAC (black) cable into a de-energized 190/230 VAC, 3-phase power source and energize the
power source.
5. Set circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 to “I” position (On).
6. Close and secure the control box door.

Figure 5.1 Autotransformer

1) Circuit Breaker (CB-2) 230-Volt 3) Dual Voltage Modular

2) 460 VAC Power Receptacle Autotransformer
-----

5.3 Adjust Fresh Air Makeup Vent

The purpose of the fresh air makeup vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circulation.
The vent must be closed when transporting frozen foods.
Air exchange depends on static pressure differential, which will vary depending on the container and how the con-
tainer is loaded.
Units may be equipped with a vent position sensor (VPS). The VPS determines the position of the upper fresh air
vent (as equipped) and sends data to the controller display.

5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent

Two slots and a stop are designed into the Upper Fresh Air disc for air flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0
to 30% air flow; the second slot allows for a 30 to 100% air flow.
To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the wing nut and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air flow
matches with the arrow. Tighten the wing nut.
To clear the gap between the slots, loosen the wing nut until the disc clears the stop.
See Figure 5.2 for air exchange values for an empty container. Higher values can be expected for a fully loaded
container.

T-372 5–2
 Figure 5.2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart

AIR AIR
FLOW FLOW
(CMH) (CMH) 60HZ
50HZ
250 300

TBAR TBAR
250 1 1/2”
200 1 1/2”
TBAR
TBAR 200 2 5/8”
2 5/8”
150 TBAR 3”
TBAR 3”
150

100
100

50 50

0
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PERCENT OPEN
PERCENT OPEN

5.3.2 Vent Position Sensor

The vent position sensor (VPS) allows the user to determine the position of the fresh air vent via Cd45. This func-
tion code is accessible via the CODE SELECT key.
The vent position will display for 30 seconds whenever motion corresponding to 5 CMH (3 CFM) or greater is
detected. It will scroll in intervals of 5 CMH (3 CFM). Scrolling to Cd45 will display the fresh air vent position.
The position of the vent will be recorded in the DataCORDER whenever the unit is running under AC power and
during any of the following conditions:
• Trip start
• Every power cycle
• Midnight
• Manual changes greater than 5 CMH (3 CFM) remaining in the new position for at least four minutes

NOTE
The user has four minutes to make necessary adjustments to the vent setting. This time calculation
begins on the initial movement of the sensor. The vent can be moved to any position within the four min-
utes. On completion of the first four minutes, the vent is required to remain stable for the next four min-
utes. If vent position changes are detected during the four-minute stability period, AL250 will be
generated. This provides the user with the ability to change the vent setting without generating multiple
events in the DataCORDER.

5.4 EverFRESH Operation

Procedures and technical information related to the EverFRESH controlled atmosphere system can be found in the
T-374 EverFRESH Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the
manual from the Literature section, click on Options > EverFRESH.

5.5 Connect Water-Cooled Condenser

The water-cooled condenser is used when cooling water is available and heating the surrounding air is objection-
able, such as in a ship’s hold. If water-cooled operation is desired, connect in accordance with the following sub-
paragraphs.

5–3 T-372
5.5.1 Water-Cooled Condenser with Water Pressure Switch
1. Connect the water supply line to the inlet side of the condenser and the discharge line to the outlet side of
the condenser (see Figure 3.5).
2. Maintain a flow rate of 11 to 26 liters per minute (3 to 7 gallons per minute). The water pressure switch will
open to de-energize the condenser fan relay. The condenser fan motor will stop and will remain stopped
until the water pressure switch closes.
3. To shift to air-cooled condenser operation, disconnect the water supply and the discharge line to the water-
cooled condenser. The refrigeration unit will shift to air-cooled condenser operation when the water pressure
switch closes.

5.5.2 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser Fan Switch

1. Connect the water supply line to the inlet side of condenser and the discharge line to the outlet side of the
condenser (see Figure 3.5).
2. Maintain a flow rate of 11 to 26 lpm (3 to 7 gpm).
3. Set the condenser fan switch to position “O.” This will de-energize the condenser fan relay. The condenser
fan motor will stop and remain stopped until the CFS switch is set to position “I.”

! CAUTION
When condenser water flow is below 11 lpm (3 gpm) or when water-cooled operation is not in
use, the CFS switch MUST be set to position “1” or the unit will not operate properly.
4. To shift to air-cooled condenser operation, stop the unit, set the CFS switch to position “I” and restart the
unit. Disconnect the water lines to the water-cooled condenser.

5.6 Starting and Stopping Instructions

! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) CB-1 & CB-2 and the Start-Stop switch (ST) are in the
“O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.

NOTE
The electronic phase detection system will check for proper compressor rotation within the first 30 sec-
onds. If rotation is not correct, the compressor will be stopped and restarted in the opposite direction. If
the compressor is producing unusually loud and continuous noise after the first 30 seconds of operation,
stop the unit and investigate.

5.6.1 Starting the Unit

1. Verify that power is properly applied, the fresh air vent is in proper position, and (if required) the water-
cooled condenser is connected.
2. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to position “I” (ON) (see Figure 3.6). The controller function codes for the
container ID (Cd40), software version (Cd18) and unit model number (Cd20) will be displayed in sequence.
3. Continue with the Start Up Inspection. See Section 5.7.

5.6.2 Stopping the Unit

1. To stop the unit, place the Start-Stop switch (ST) in position “0” (OFF).

5.7 Start-Up Inspection

5.7.1 Physical Inspection
Check rotation of the condenser and evaporator fans.
5.7.2 Check Controller Function Codes
Check, and if required, reset controller Function Codes (Cd27 through Cd39) in accordance with desired operating
parameters. See Table 4–8.

T-372 5–4
5.7.3 Start Temperature Recorder in DataCORDER
1. Check and, if required, set the DataCORDER Configuration in accordance with desired recording parame-
ter. See Section 4.6.4.
2. Enter a “Trip Start” with the following instructions:
a. Press the ALT MODE key.
b. When the left display shows “dC”, press the ENTER key.
c. Use the Arrow keys to bring up function code dC30.
d. Press and hold the ENTER key for five seconds.
e. The “Trip Start” event will be entered in the DataCORDER.

5.7.4 Complete Inspection

Allow the unit to run for five minutes to stabilize conditions, and then perform a pre-trip diagnosis in accordance
with Section 5.8.

5.8 Pre-Trip Diagnosis

! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When PRE-TRIP key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated.
At the completion of pre-trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reac-
tivated.

Pre-trip diagnosis provides automatic testing of the unit components using internal measurements and comparison
logic. The program will provide a “PASS” or “FAIL” display to indicate test results.
The testing begins with access to a pre-trip selection menu. The user may have the option of selecting one of two
automatic tests.
These tests will automatically perform a series of individual pre-trip tests. The user may also scroll down to select
any of the individual tests.
When only the short sequence is configured, it will appear as “AUtO” in the display. Otherwise “AUtO1” will indicate
the short sequence and “AUtO2” will indicate the long sequence. The test short sequence will run tests P0 through
P6. The long test sequence will run tests P0 through P10.
A detailed description of the pre-trip test codes is listed in Table 4–9. If no selection is made, the pre-trip menu
selection process will terminate automatically. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated man-
ually if required.
Scrolling down to the “rSLts” code and pressing ENTER will allow the user to scroll through the results of the last
pre-trip testing run. If no Pre-testing has been run (or an individual test has not been run) since the unit was pow-
ered up, “- - - -” will be displayed.

NOTE
Pre-trip may also be initiated via communications. The operation is the same as for the keypad initiation
described below except that should a test fail, the pre-trip mode will automatically terminate. When initi-
ated via communications, a pre-trip test may not be interrupted with an arrow key, but the pre-trip test
can be terminated with the PRE-TRIP key.

5–5 T-372
Prior to starting a pre-trip test, very the following:
• Unit voltage (Cd07) is within tolerance
• Unit amperage draw (Cd04, Cd05, Cd06) are within expected limits
• All alarms are cleared and rectified.

5.8.1 Starting a Pre-Trip

1. Press the PRE-TRIP key to access the pre-trip test selection menu. “SELCt PrtrP” will be displayed.

2. To Run an Automatic Test: Scroll through the selections by pressing the Up or Down Arrow keys to display
AUTO, AUTO 1, AUTO 2 or AUTO 3 as desired, then press the ENTER key.
• The unit will execute the series of tests without any need for direct user interface. These tests vary in
length, depending on the component under test.
• While tests are running, “P#-#” will appear on the left display; the #’s indicate the test number and sub-
test. The right display will show a countdown time in minutes and seconds, indicating the amount of time
remaining in the test.

When a Pre-trip Auto 1 test runs to completion without a failure, the unit will exit Pre-trip mode
and return to normal control operation. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be
reactivated manually if required.

! CAUTION
When a Pre-trip Auto 2 test runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
Pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key!

3. When an automatic test fails, it will be repeated once. A repeated test failure will cause “FAIL” to be shown
on the right display, with the corresponding test number to the left. The user may then press the Down Arrow
key to repeat the test, the Up Arrow key to skip to the next test, or the PRE-TRIP key to terminate testing.
The unit will wait indefinitely or until the user manually enters a command.

! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting oper-
ator intervention.

4. To Run an Individual Test: Scroll through the selections by pressing the Up or Down Arrow keys to display
an individual test code. Press the ENTER key when the desired test code is displayed.
• Individually selected tests, other than the LED / Display test, will perform the operations necessary to ver-
ify the operation of the component. At the conclusion, “PASS” or “FAIL” will be displayed. This message
will remain displayed for up to three minutes, during which time a user may select another test. If the
three minute time period expires, the unit will terminate Pre-trip and return to control mode operation.
• While the tests are being executed, the user may terminate the Pre-trip diagnostics by pressing and hold-
ing the PRE-TRIP key. The unit will then resume normal operation. If the user decides to terminate a test
but remain at the test selection menu, the user may press the Up Arrow key. When this is done, all test
outputs will be de-energized and the test selection menu will be displayed.
• Throughout the duration of any Pre-trip test (except the P-7 high pressure switch tests), the current limit-
ing and pressure limiting processes are both active. The current limiting process only is active for P-7.

T-372 5–6
5.8.2 Displaying Pre-Trip Test Results
1. Press the PRE-TRIP key to access the Pre-trip test selection menu. “SELCt PrtrP” will be displayed.
2. Press the Arrow keys until the message “P,” “rSLts” (Pre-trip results) is displayed.
3. Press the ENTER key. The results for all Pre-trip sub tests are available from this menu (i.e., 1-0, 1-1, etc).
The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all the tests run to completion since power up. If a
test has not been run since power up, “- - - - -” will be displayed.
Once all Pre-test activity is completed, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if
required.

5.9 Probe Diagnostics

A complete temperature probe check is performed during the P5 Pre-trip test. A probe check is also run at the end
of a defrost cycle; the defrost light will remain on during this period. If supply probes are within limits and return
probes are within limits, the unit will return to normal operation. During normal operation, the controller continu-
ously monitors and compares adjacent temperature probe readings.
The probe check procedure consists of running the evaporator fans for up to eight minutes in order to compare the
readings from the adjacent temperature probes. If a significant difference in temperature readings is detected
between probes, a defrost cycle, followed by another probe check may be initiated. Any continued disagreement
between probes will prompt the controller to invalidate the failed temperature probe, and the backup probe will be
used for temperature control.
In Perishable Mode, both pairs of supply and return probes are monitored for probe disagreement. Probe disagreement
is considered a difference of 0.5°C (0.9°F) or greater between the supply air sensors and/ or a difference of 2.0°C
(3.6°F) between the return air sensors. Probe disagreement found in either pair can trigger a defrost probe check.
In Frozen Mode, only the controlling probes are considered. Disagreement of the controlling probes can trigger a
defrost probe check, which will occur when the difference between the sensors is greater than 2.0°C (3.6°F). Nor-
mally, the controlling probes are the return probes but if both return probes are invalidated, the supply probes are
used for control purposes. Probe disagreement of the non-controlling probe pair will not trigger a defrost probe check.
If after the defrost probe check the supply probes agree and return probes agree, all supply and return sensors are
considered valid and the unit returns to normal control.
In the Case of Probe Disagreement:
If the supply probes disagree and the return probes agree, the controller will invalidate the worst supply probe. If the
probe check is run as part of pre-trip P-5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time defrost
probe check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be triggered. However, if the best supply
probe is greater than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its return probes, the best supply probe is also invali-
dated. If unit is in Perishable Mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both supply probes.
If the supply probes agree and the return probes disagree, invalidate the worst return probe. If the probe check is
being run as part of pre-trip P-5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time defrost probe
check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be necessary. If the best return probe is greater
than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its supply probes, then the best return probe is also invalidated. If the
unit is in perishable mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both return probes.

5–7 T-372
5.10 TripWise (Option)
TripWiseTM is a new premium option available for PrimeLINE and PrimeLINE with Edge units. TripWise is software
logic that runs during every voyage as often as possible to indicate whether a standard Pre-trip Inspection (PTI) is
needed and skip unless necessary. The tests run in the background and are similar to those completed as part of
the standard PTI selection, which includes the following:
• Alarm Presence • Defrost Temperature Sensor
• Evaporator Motor Current • Electronic Expansion Valve
• Heater Current • RMU Presence
• Condenser Motor Current • Compressor Test
• Compressor Current • Digital Loader / Unloader Valves
• Humidity Sensor • Economizer Valve
• Supply / Return Sensors • Temperature Control
• Evaporator Temperature and Pressure Sensors • Suction / Discharge Temperature and Pressure

5.10.1 Checking TripWise Status

To check the status of the container, press the PRE-TRIP key on the keypad. The message “SELCt | PrtrP” will
appear on the display module, alternating with one of the following TripWise status messages:
• trIPW | OFF. The TripWise option is turned off.
• trIPW | EX (Expired). It is recommended to pre-trip the unit prior to the unit's next trip following customer-
specific guidelines.
• trIPW | PASS. The container should be ready for use after the operator has conducted a visual inspection.
Standard PTI is not required.
• trIPW | CHECK. If any TripWise test(s) execute and do not meet the pass / fail requirements, It is recom-
mended to pre-trip the unit following customer-specific guidelines prior to the unit's next trip.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

Pressing the ENTER key while “SELCt | PrtrP” is displayed will enter into the Pre-trip test menu. Pressing the
Arrow keys will navigate through the standard PTI test selections menu.

5.10.2 Enabling or Disabling TripWise Option

1. Press the CODE SELECT key on the keypad.
2. Use the Arrow keys to bring up code Cd65 in the display.
3. Press the ENTER key. The display will show either “-----”, “OFF” or “ON”.

NOTE
If “-----” is displayed, the TripWise function option is not active on the unit. To add this option to the unit,
the equipment owner would need to contact their Regional Carrier Sales Manager.

4. Use the Arrow keys to toggle between “ON” and “OFF” and then press the ENTER key to select the desired
option.
5. If “ON” is selected, the display will show “dAYS”. This is the expiration time (2 through 365 in 1 day incre-
ments). Use the Arrow keys to change the parameter and then press the ENTER key to confirm.

NOTE
The expiration interval is the total maximum days allowed between the running of each test. For exam-
ple, if days are set to 30 and the low speed evaporator fan test has not run within those 30 days, the
TripWise expired message will be displayed. If the TripWise expired message is displayed, it is recom-
mended to Pre-trip the unit following customer specific guidelines prior to the next trip.

T-372 5–8
5.10.3 TripWise Status Event
A TripWise status event will be recorded in the DataCORDER recorder when the PTI is selected. In the current
DataLINE software release, the event will show the status of the unit.

Figure 5.3 TripWise Status in DataCORDER

In DataLINE, perform an all data download by selecting from the drop down menu “TripWise Summary” and then
select a date in “User Logged Events” as shown in the Figure below.

Figure 5.4 Generating TripWise Summary Report

5–9 T-372
This will generate the status / results in a DataLINE TripWise Summary Report as shown in the Figure below.

Figure 5.5 TripWise Summary Report

Status
Results

T-372 5–10
5.11 Automatic Cold Treatment (Option)
Cold Treatment has been employed as an effective post-harvest method for the control of Mediterranean and certain
other tropical fruit flies. Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2°C (3.6°F) or below for specific time periods
results in the mortality of various life stages for this group of insects.
Automated Cold Treatment (ACT) in the Carrier Transicold unit is a method to simplify the task of completing cold
treatment by automating the process of changing the setpoints. ACT is set up through function code Cd51. Refer to
Function Code table in this manual for Cd51 menu processing and displays.

NOTE
ACT, setup with Cd51, and Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC), setup with Cd53, will not work simultane-
ously. Setting one will deactivate the other.

Procedure to Set ACT:

1. Enter the required cargo setpoint. It must be lower than the treatment temperature discussed in step 5.
2. Press the CODE SELECT key.
3. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to Cd51, and then press the ENTER key.
4. "ACt" is now displayed in the left display and the right will display "Off". Use the Arrow keys to bring up "On"
in the right display and press the ENTER key.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

5. “trEAt" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing the last setting (shown as XX.X°C).
Use the Arrow keys to select the desired cold treatment setpoint and press the ENTER key.

NOTE
"trEAt" is the maximum value that the USDA probes need to remain below, to pass the Cold Treatment pro-
tocol. For instance, if the treat value is set at 35.0°F (1.7°C) then the USDA probe temperatures must
remain below 35.0°F (1.7°C) to pass.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

6. "dAyS" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing. Use the Arrow keys to select the
desired days for cold treatment and press the ENTER key.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

7. "ProbE" is now displayed in the left display and the right will display the probe numbers that are connected.
Press the ENTER key. For instance, if "1234" is displayed, then all four of the probes are connected.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

5–11 T-372
 8. "SPnEW" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing. Use the Arrow keys to select the
desired setpoint after the cold treatment process has successfully completed and press the ENTER key.
This would be the final temperature prior to the delivery of the cargo.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

9. Cd51 is now displayed in the left display and the right will display days / hours remaining in cold treatment.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

10. The unit will start to countdown once all detected USDA probes have reached the specified cold treatment
temperature. The cold treatment process will continue until the specified number of days is reached. During
operation, Cd51 will show the number of days and hours remaining in the cold treatment.

NOTE
Once the cold treatment process has been initiated, setpoint change via the keypad is disabled.
11. While the unit is operating in ACT mode, the left hand display will alternate between "COLd" and setpoint.
The right hand display will alternate between "trEAt" and the cargo temperature. Once the treatment time
has been completed, the setpoint temperature will increase to the "SPnEW" setting chosen in step 8.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

12. When the cold treatment process is complete, the "SPnEW" setpoint will be displayed in the left hand dis-
play and cargo temperature in the right hand display, alternating with "COLd" "Done". "COLd" "Done" will
continue to alternate with the setpoint and cargo temperature until ACT is turned off.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

Procedure to Turn ACT OFF:

ACT will be automatically turned off with a TripStart, or if a Pretrip is initiated.
1. To manually turn ACT Off, press the CODE SELECT key.
2. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to Cd51, and then press the ENTER key.
3. Use the Arrow keys to bring up "Off" in the right display and press the ENTER key.

T-372 5–12
5.12 Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) Cd53
Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) allows up to 6 setpoint changes to be pre-programmed over defined periods of
time using Cd53.
1. Press the CODE SELECT key.
2. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to Cd53, then press the ENTER key.
3. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to ON, then press the ENTER key. If ASC is already ON, selecting OFF will ter-
minate ASC.
4. Select the desired number of setpoint changes (nSC) by scrolling through the available “flashing” options (1
– 6) in the right display, then press the ENTER key.
5. Select the initial setpoint: With (SP 0) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” setpoint
in the right display and press ENTER.
6. Select the days desired for initial setpoint (SP 0): With (DAY 0) in the left display, select by scrolling to the
desired “flashing” days (1 to 99) in the right display and press ENTER.
7. Select the next setpoint (SP 1): With (SP 1) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” set-
point in the right display and press ENTER.
8. Continue to select each additional setpoint.
9. Select a final setpoint (SP x): With (SP x) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” set-
point in the right display and press ENTER.

While the unit is operating in ASC mode, the left hand display will alternate between current unit setpoint and
“ASC”. The right hand display will alternate between current control temperature and “ACtvE”. The user can deter-
mine the amount of time left at the current setpoint by selecting Cd53. The amount of time left will be displayed in
the right display (XX (days) / XX (hours). By sequentially pressing ENTER, set parameters can be viewed.
At completion of ASC mode, the left hand display will alternate between current unit setpoint “ASC”. The right hand
display will alternate between current control temperature and “Done”.
The display will remain this way until ASC is turned off. The user can determine the date of completion by selecting
Cd53. With (done) in the left display, the date of completion will be displayed in the right display (Month / Day).
ASC can be manually turned off by selecting Cd53, scrolling to “Off” and pressing the ENTER key.
ACS will be automatically turned off after three days without power, or if a Pre-trip is initiated.
ACS (Cd53) will work independently of Automatic Cold Treatment (ACT) (Cd51). Setting one deactivates the other.

5–13 T-372
 SECTION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference

Section
6.1 Unit will not Start or Starts then Stops
External power source OFF Turn on
Start-Stop switch (ST) OFF or defective Check
No power to unit
Circuit breaker tripped or OFF Check
Autotransformer not connected Section 5.2.2
Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
Control transformer defective Replace
Loss of control power
Fuse (F3 / F4) blown Check
Start-Stop switch (ST) OFF or defective Check
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.17
Condenser fan motor internal protector open Section 7.9
Compressor internal protector open Section 7.9
Component(s) not operating
High pressure switch open Section 6.7
Heat termination thermostat open Replace
Malfunction of current sensor Replace
Low line voltage Check
Compressor hums, but does Single phasing Check
not start Shorted or grounded motor windings Section 7.9
Compressor seized Section 7.9
6.2 Unit Operates Long or Continuously in Cooling
Hot load Normal
Container
Defective box insulation or air leak Repair
Shortage of refrigerant Section 7.3
Evaporator coil covered with ice Section 6.6
Evaporator coil plugged with debris Section 7.15
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.15 / Section 7.17
Air bypass around evaporator coil Check
Controller set too low Reset
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve Open valves completely
Refrigeration system
partially closed
Dirty condenser Section 7.11.2
Compressor worn Section 7.9
Current limit (function code Cd32) set to wrong value Section 4.3.25
Economizer solenoid valve malfunction Section 7.25
Digital unloader valve stuck open Replace
Electronic expansion valve Replace

6–1 T-372
 Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Section
6.3 Unit Runs but has Insufficient Cooling
Abnormal pressures Section 6.7
Abnormal temperatures Section 6.15
Abnormal currents Section 6.16
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Evaporator fan or motor defective Section 7.17
Refrigeration system
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve Open valves completely
partially closed
Frost on coil Section 6.10
Digital unloader valve stuck open Replace
Electronic expansion valve Replace
6.4 Unit will not Heat or has Insufficient Heating
Start-Stop switch (ST) OFF or defective Check
No operation of any kind Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
External power source OFF Turn ON
Circuit breaker or fuse defective Replace
Control Transformer defective Replace
No control power Evaporator fan internal motor protector open Section 7.17
Heat relay defective Check
Heater termination thermostat open Section 7.15
Heater(s) defective Section 7.15
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective or rotating back- Section 7.15 / Section 7.17
wards
Unit will not heat or has Evaporator fan motor contactor defective Replace
insufficient heat
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Defective wiring Replace
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Low line voltage Section 3.3
6.5 Unit will not Terminate Heating
Controller improperly set Reset
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Unit fails to stop heating
Heater termination thermostat remains closed along Section 7.15
with the heat relay
6.6 Unit will not Defrost Properly
Defrost timer malfunction (Cd27) Table 4–7
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Will not initiate defrost Defective wiring Replace
automatically Defrost temperature sensor defective or heat termina- Replace
tion thermostat open
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace

T-372 6–2
 Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Section
Manual defrost switch defective Replace
Will not initiate defrost
Keypad is defective Replace
manually
Defrost temperature sensor open Replace
Initiates but relay (DR) drops Low line voltage Section 3.3
out
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Initiates but does not defrost
Heater(s) burned out Section 7.15
Frequent defrost Wet load Normal
6.7 Abnormal Pressures
Condenser coil dirty Section 7.11.2
Condenser fan rotating backwards Section 7.11
Condenser fan inoperative Section 7.12
High discharge pressure
Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.3
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace
Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
tor pressure transducer (EPT)
Suction service valve partially closed\ Open
Filter drier partially plugged Section 7.14
Low suction pressure Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow Section 7.15
Excessive frost on evaporator coil Section 6.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.17.3
EEV control malfunction Replace
Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace

Suction and discharge Compressor operating in reverse Section 6.14

pressures tend to equalize Compressor cycling/stopped Check
when unit is operating Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
6.8 Abnormal Noise or Vibrations
Compressor start up after an extended shutdown Normal
Brief chattering when manually shut down
Compressor operating in reverse Section 6.14
Compressor
Loose mounting bolts or worn resilient mounts Tighten / Replace
Loose upper mounting Section 7.9.1
Loose slugging Section 7.15
Bent, loose or striking venturi Check
Condenser or Evaporator
Worn motor bearings Section 7.12 / Section 7.17
Fan
Bent motor shaft Section 7.12 / Section 7.17

6–3 T-372
 Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Section
6.9 Microprocessor Malfunction
Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check
Defective sensor Section 7.28
Will not control
Defective wiring Check
Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3
6.10 No Evaporator Air Flow or Restricted Air Flow
Frost on coil Section 6.6
Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil Section 7.15
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.17
No or partial evaporator air Evaporator fan motor(s) defective Section 7.17
flow Evaporator fan(s) loose or defective Section 7.17
Evaporator fan contactor defective Replace
6.11 Electronic Expansion Valve Malfunction
Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
tor pressure transducer (EPT)
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter drier partially plugged Section 7.14
Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3
Low suction pressure
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow Section 7.15
Excessive frost on evaporator coil Section 6.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.17.3
EEV control malfunction Section 7.19
Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace
Foreign material in valve Section 7.19
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
High suction pressure with tor pressure transducer (EPT)
low superheat EEV control malfunction Replace
Improperly seated powerhead Ensure powerhead is
locked and in place
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
Liquid slugging in tor pressure transducer (EPT)
compressor
Failed EEV Replace
6.12 Autotransformer Malfunction
Circuit breaker (CB-1 or CB-2) tripped Check
Autotransformer defective Section 7.26
Unit will not start
Power source not turned ON Check
460 VAC power plug is not inserted into the receptacle Section 5.2.1

T-372 6–4
 Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Section
6.13 Water-Cooled Condenser or Water Pressure Switch
Dirty coil
High discharge pressure Section 7.13
Non-condensibles
Condenser fan starts and Water pressure switch malfunction Check
stops Water supply interruption Check
6.14 Compressor Operating in Reverse

NOTE
The compressor may start in reverse for up to 10 seconds to determine correct phase rotation
if required for phase detection.

! CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate in reverse for more than two minutes will result in
internal compressor damage. Turn the start- stop switch OFF immediately.
Incorrect wiring of compressor
Electrical Incorrect wiring of compressor contactor(s) Check
Incorrect wiring of current sensor
6.15 Abnormal Temperatures
Condenser coil dirty Section 7.11.2
Condenser fan rotating backwards Section 7.12
Condenser fan inoperative Section 7.12.1
Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.3
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace
High discharge temperature Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
tor pressure transducer (EPT)
Discharge temperature sensor drifting high Replace
Failed economizer expansion valve, economizer coil, Replace
or economizer solenoid valve
Plugged economizer expansion valve, economizer Replace
coil, or economizer solenoid valve
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace
6.16 Abnormal Currents
Unit reads abnormal currents Current sensor wiring Check

6–5 T-372
 SECTION 7
SERVICE

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge only with refrigerants R-134a or R-513A as specified
for the unit model number: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.

NOTE
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refrigerant. When working with refrigerants you must
comply with all local government environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA section 608.

NOTE
Annual maintenance procedures for PrimeLINE units 69NT40-561 can be found in the 62-10327 Annual
Maintenance Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the
manual from the Literature section, click on Container Units > All Container Units > Operation.

7.1 Section Layout

Service procedures are provided in this section beginning with refrigeration system service, then refrigeration sys-
tem component service, electrical system service, temperature recorder service and general service. Refer to the
Table of Contents to locate specific topics.

7.2 Manifold Gauge Set

The manifold gauge set (see Figure 7.1) is used to determine system operating pressure, add refrigerant charge,
and to equalize or evacuate the system.

Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set

2 3

1 4
7 6 5

1) Suction Pressure Valve (shown 5) High Side Connection

backseated) 6) Utility Connection to:
2) Suction Pressure Gauge a. Refrigerant Cylinder
3) Discharge Pressure Gauge b. Vacuum Pump
4) Discharge Pressure Valve c. Oil Container
(shown frontseated) 7) Low Side Connection
-----
When the suction pressure valve (1) is frontseated (turned all the way in), the suction (low) pressure can be
checked at the suction pressure gauge (2).
When the discharge pressure valve (4) is frontseated, the discharge (high) pressure can be checked at the dis-
charge pressure gauge (3).

7–1 T-372
When both valves are backseated (all the way out), high pressure vapor will flow into the low side.
When the suction pressure valve (1) is open and the discharge pressure valve (4) shut, the system can be charged
through the utility connection (6). Oil can also be added to the system.
A manifold gauge / hose set with self-sealing hoses (see Figure 7.2) is required for service of the models covered
within this manual. The manifold gauge/hose set is available from Carrier Transicold (part number 07-00294-00,
which includes items 1 through 6, Figure 7.2).

NOTE
It is recommended that the manifold gauge set be dedicated to specified refrigerant (R-134a or R-513A).

7.2.1 Evacuating the Manifold Gauge Set

If the manifold gauge / hose set is new or was exposed to the atmosphere, it will need to be evacuated to remove
contaminants and air as follows:
1. Backseat (turn counterclockwise) both field service couplings (see Figure 7.2) and midseat both hand valves.
2. Connect the yellow hose to a vacuum pump and refrigerant cylinder.
3. Evacuate to 10 inches of vacuum and then charge with refrigerant to a slightly positive pressure of 0.1 kg /
cm2 (1.0 psig).
4. Frontseat both manifold gauge set valves and disconnect from cylinder. The gauge set is now ready for use.

Figure 7.2 Manifold Gauge/Hose Set

To Low Side To High Side

Access Valve Access Valve
2
6
1

4 3
4
7 5
2

1) RED Refrigeration and/or Evacuation 5) High Side Field Service Coupling (Red
Hose (SAE J2196/R-134a) Knob)
2) Hose Fitting (0.5-16 Acme) 6) BLUE Refrigeration and/or Evacuation
3) YELLOW Refrigeration and/or Hose (SAE J2196/R-134a)
Evacuation Hose (SAE J2196/R-134a) 7) Low Side Field Service Coupling (Blue
4) Hose Fitting with O-ring (M14 x 1.5) Knob)
-----

7.3 Service Connections

The compressor suction, compressor discharge, and the liquid line service valves (see Figure 7.3) are provided with a
double seat and an access valve which enables servicing of the compressor and refrigerant lines.
Turning the valve stem clockwise (all the way forward) will frontseat the valve to close off the line connection and
open a path to the access valve. Turning the stem counterclockwise (all the way out) will backseat the valve to
open the line connection and close off the path to the access valve.

T-372 7–2
With the valve stem midway between frontseat and backseat, both of the service valve connections are open to the
access valve path. For example, the valve stem is first fully backseated when connecting a manifold gauge to mea-
sure pressure. Then, the valve is opened 1/4 to 1/2 turn to measure the pressure.

Figure 7.3 Service Valve

1
2
5

Valve (Frontseated) 4 Valve (Backseated)

1) Access Valve 4) Compressor or Filter Drier Inlet

2) Step Cap Connection
3) Valve Stem 5) Line Connection
-----
Connection of the manifold gauge / hose set (see Figure 7.4) is dependent on the component being serviced. If
only the compressor is being serviced, the high side coupling is connected to the discharge service valve.
For service of the low side (after pump down), the high side coupling is connected to the liquid line service valve.
The center hose connection is brought to the tool being used (vacuum, tank, etc.).

7.3.1 Connecting the Manifold Gauge Set

1. Remove the service valve stem cap and make sure the valve is backseated.
2. Remove the access valve cap (see Figure 7.3).
3. Connect the field service coupling (see Figure 7.2) to the access valve.
4. Turn the field service coupling knob clockwise to open the system to the gauge set.
5. Slightly midseat the service valve to read system pressures.
6. Repeat the procedure to connect the other side of the gauge set.

! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set, make sure set is brought to
suction pressure before disconnecting.

7.3.2 Removing the Manifold Gauge Set

1. While the compressor is still ON, backseat the high side service valve.
2. Midseat both hand valves on the manifold gauge set and allow the pressure in the manifold gauge set to be
drawn down to low side pressure. This returns any liquid that may be in the high side hose to the system.
3. Backseat the low side service valve.
4. Backseat both field service couplings and frontseat both manifold hand valves.
5. Remove couplings from the access valves.
6. Install both service valve stem caps and service port caps (finger-tight only).

7.4 Pump Down the Unit

To service the filter drier, economizer, expansion valves, economizer solenoid valve, digital unloader valve or evap-
orator coil, pump the refrigerant into the high side of the unit:

7–3 T-372
 ! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor to
evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or discharge
service valves closed (frontseated). Internal damage will result from operating the compressor in
a deep vacuum.

7.4.1 Automatic Pump Down

1. To perform an Automatic Pump Down, use function code Cd59 Pump Down Logic. Refer to Cd59
description in Table 4–8 Controller Function Codes.

7.4.2 Manual Pump Down:

1. Attach manifold gauge set to the compressor suction and discharge service valves. See Section 7.2.
2. Start the unit and run in the frozen mode, with controller set below -10°C (14°F), for 10 to 15 minutes.
3. Check function code Cd21 (see Section 4.2.2). The economizer solenoid valve should be open. If not,
continue to run until the valve opens.
4. Frontseat the liquid line service valve. When the suction reaches a positive pressure of 0.1 bar (1.4 psig),
place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn the unit Off.
5. Frontseat the suction service valve and discharge service valve. The refrigerant will be trapped between the
discharge service valve and the liquid line valve.
6. Before opening up any part of the system, a slight positive pressure should be indicated on the pressure
gauge. Remove power from the unit before opening any part of the system. If a vacuum is indicated, emit
refrigerant by cracking the liquid line valve momentarily to build up a slight positive pressure.
7. When opening up the refrigerant system, certain parts may frost. Allow the part to warm to ambient
temperature before dismantling. This avoids internal condensation which puts moisture in the system.
8. After repairs have been made, make sure to perform a refrigerant leak check (see Section 7.5), and
evacuate and dehydrate the low side (see Section 7.6).
9. Check refrigerant charge. See Section 7.7.1.

7.5 Refrigerant Leak Checking

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge only with refrigerants R-134a or R-513A as specified
for the unit model number: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.
1. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a system is with an appropriate electronic leak detector.
Testing joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating large leaks.
2. If the system is without refrigerant, charge the system with refrigerant to build up pressure between 2.1 to
3.5 bar (30.5 to 50.8 psig). To ensure complete pressurization of the system, refrigerant should be charged
at the compressor suction valve and the liquid line service valve. Remove refrigerant cylinder and leak-
check all connections.

NOTE
Only refrigerant R-134a or R-513A, as specified for the unit model number, should be used to pressurize the
system. Any other gas or vapor will contaminate the system, which will require additional purging and evacuation
of the system.
3. If required, remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system and repair any leaks. Check for leaks.
4. Evacuate and dehydrate the unit. See Section 7.6.
5. Charge unit. See Section 7.7.

T-372 7–4
7.6 Evacuation and Dehydration
7.6.1 General
Moisture is detrimental to refrigeration systems. The presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can have many
undesirable effects. The most common are copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freezing-up” of metering devices
by free water, and formation of acids, resulting in metal corrosion.

7.6.2 Preparation
1. Evacuate and dehydrate only after completing a pressure leak test. See Section 7.5.
2. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate any system include a vacuum pump (8m3/hr = 5 cfm
volume displacement) and an electronic vacuum gauge. The pump is available from Carrier Transicold, P/N
07-00176-11. The micron gauge is P/N 07-00414-00.
3. If possible, keep the ambient temperature above 15.6°C (60°F) to speed evaporation of moisture. If the
ambient temperature is lower than 15.6°C (60°F), ice might form before moisture removal is complete. Heat
lamps or alternate sources of heat may be used to raise the system temperature.
4. Additional time may be saved during a complete system pump down by replacing the filter drier with a
section of copper tubing and the appropriate fittings. Installation of a new drier may be performed during the
charging procedure.

Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections

11 1
10

9
3

8
S D

6 5

1) Compressor 6) Refrigerant Cylinder

2) Discharge Service 7) Reclaimer
Connection 8) Manifold Gauge Set
3) Suction Service Connection 9) Liquid Service Connection
4) Vacuum Pump 10) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
5) Electronic Vacuum Gauge 11) Receiver or Water-Cooled Condenser
-----

7.6.3 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Complete System

NOTE
Refer to Partial System procedure for information pertaining to partial system evacuation and dehydration.
1. Remove all refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system.

7–5 T-372
 2. The recommended method to evacuate and dehydrate the system is to connect evacuation hoses at the
compressor suction and liquid line service valve (see Figure 7.4). Make sure the service hoses are suited
for evacuation purposes.

NOTE
To prevent the area between the Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) and the compressor from being isolated
during evacuation, it is necessary to open the ESV using a magnet tool (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00512-00).
3. Remove the ESV coil from the valve body. Place the magnet tool over the valve stem. An audible click will
be heard when the ESV opens.

NOTE
Make sure to replace the valve coil before restating the unit. Starting the unit with the coil removed from the
valve will burn out the coil.
4. Test the evacuation setup for leaks by backseating the unit service valves and drawing a deep vacuum with
the vacuum pump and gauge valves open. Shut off the pump and check to see if the vacuum holds. Repair
leaks if necessary.
5. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves.
6. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum gauge valves, if they are not already open. Start the vacuum
pump. Evacuate the unit until the electronic vacuum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the electronic
vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure the
vacuum holds.
7. Break the vacuum with either clean refrigerant (R-134a or R-513A as specified for the unit model number) or
dry nitrogen. Raise system pressure to roughly 0.14 bar (2 psig), monitoring it with the compound gauge.
8. If refrigerant was used, remove using a refrigerant recovery system. If nitrogen was used, relieve the pressure.
9. Repeat steps 6 and 7 one time.
10. Remove the copper tubing and change the filter drier. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the electronic
vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait five minutes to see if vacuum
holds. This procedure checks for residual moisture and/or leaks.
11. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant charge may be drawn into the system from a refrigerant
container on weight scales.

7.6.4 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Partial System

1. If refrigerant charge has been removed from the low side only, evacuate the low side by connecting the
evacuation set-up at the compressor suction valve and the liquid service valve but leave the service valves
frontseated until evacuation is completed.
2. Once evacuation has been completed and the pump has been isolated, fully backseat the service valves to
isolate the service connections and then continue with checking and, if required, adding refrigerant in
accordance with normal procedures.

7.7 Refrigerant Charge

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gases containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing
or operating the product. Charge only with refrigerants R-134a or R-513A as specified for the
unit model number: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.

7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge

NOTE
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refrigerant. When working with refrigerants you must
comply with all local government environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA Section 608.
1. Connect the gauge manifold to the compressor discharge and suction service valves. For units operating on
a water-cooled condenser, change over to air-cooled operation.

T-372 7–6
 2. Bring the container temperature to approximately 0°C (32°F) or below. Then set the controller setpoint to -
25°C (-13°F).
3. Partially block the condenser coil inlet air. If covering the lower portion of the coil is not sufficient, remove the
left hand infill panel and cover the left side of the coil. Increase the area blocked until the compressor
discharge pressure is raised to approximately 12.8 bar (185 psig).
4. On units equipped with a receiver, the level should be between the glasses. On units equipped with a
watercooled condenser, the level should be at the center of the glass. If the refrigerant level is not correct,
see Section 7.7.2 and Section 7.7.3 to add or remove refrigerant as required.

7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System - Full Charge

1. Evacuate the unit and leave in a deep vacuum. See Section 7.6.1.
2. Place the refrigerant cylinder on a scale and connect the charging line from cylinder to liquid line valve.
Purge the charging line at the liquid line valve and then note the weight of the cylinder and refrigerant.
3. Open the liquid valve on the cylinder. Open the liquid line valve halfway and allow liquid refrigerant to flow
into the unit until the correct weight of refrigerant has been added as indicated by scales. See Section 3.2.
4. It may be necessary to finish charging the unit through the suction service valve in gas form, due to pressure
rise in the high side of the system.
5. Backseat the manual liquid line valve to close off the gauge port. Close the liquid valve on the cylinder.
6. Start the unit in cooling mode. Run for approximately 10 minutes and check the refrigerant charge.

7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System - Partial Charge

1. Examine the refrigerant system for any evidence of leaks, and repair as necessary. See Section 7.5.
2. Maintain the conditions outlined in the beginning of this section, Section 7.7.1.
3. Fully backseat the suction service valve and remove the service port cap.
4. Connect the charging line between the suction service valve port and the refrigerant cylinder. Open the Vapor
valve.
5. Partially frontseat (turn clockwise) the suction service valve and slowly add charge until the refrigerant
appears at the proper level. Be careful not to frontseat the suction valve fully. If the compressor is operated
in a vacuum, internal damage may result.

7.8 Converting to R-513A Refrigerant

This procedure only applies to R-513A-ready units for 69NT40-561-500 models. This conversion is only by
approval of the equipment owner.
1. The compressor will have a green dot on the DUV fitting to note that it can accept R-513A.
2. Recover all R-134a refrigerant from the unit, by following procedure in Section 7.6.
3. Change the filter drier.
4. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing the vacuum pump on the liquid line and suction service valve.
5. Charge the unit with a full charge of R-513A refrigerant, by following procedure in Section 7.7.2. Charge
amounts are found in Section 3.2 Refrigeration System Data.

! CAUTION
When charging the unit with R-513A refrigerant, charge as a liquid only. R-513A is an azeotrope
blend containing R-1234yf and R-134a. Charging or topping off as a vapor will result in an
incorrect mixture of blend in the system.
6. Upon completion, change the refrigerant label (Carrier P/N 76-50235-00) on the front of the unit indicating
the change in refrigerant.

7–7 T-372
7.9 Compressor

! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the compressor.

! WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor, be sure to relieve the internal pressure very carefully
by slightly loosening the couplings to break the seal.

! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or
discharge service valves closed (frontseated). Internal damage will result from operating the
compressor in a deep vacuum.

! CAUTION
The PrimeLINE unit has a hermetically sealed compressor that should not be opened and/or
repaired. Doing so can cause a loss in performance and premature system failure due to the
precision machinery and assembly required within the compressor. To repair the unit, remove
the faulty compressor and replace with an approved Carrier compressor. If the return of the
compressor is not required, follow local waste collection & recycling regulations in discarding
the compressor.

NOTICE
Replacement compressors are supplied without oil.

7.9.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor

1. Turn the unit ON and run it in full cool mode for 10 minutes.

NOTE
If the compressor is not operational, frontseat the suction and discharge service valves and go to step 5 below.
2. Frontseat the manual liquid line valve and allow the unit to pull-down to 0.1 kg/cm2 (1 psig).
3. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0”, turn the unit circuit breaker (CB-1) OFF, and disconnect power to the unit.
4. Frontseat the discharge and suction service valves.
5. Remove all remaining refrigerant from the compressor using a refrigerant recovery system.
6. Remove the compressor terminal cover, disconnect the ground wire and pull the cable plug from the
compressor terminals. Install the terminal cover back after removing the power cable.

NOTE
Inspect the power cable (plug) terminals to ensure they are not deformed or have any signs of heat or
arcing. If any damage is noted, replace the power cable.
7. Remove the Rotalock fittings from the suction and discharge service connections, and uncouple the
unloader and economizer lines from the compressor.
8. Cut the dome ambient temperature sensor (CPDS) wires. The replacement compressor comes with a
CPDS already assembled.
9. Remove and save the compressor base mounting bolts. Discard the four top resilient mounts and washers.
10. Remove (slide out) the old compressor from the unit.

T-372 7–8
11. Inspect the compressor base plate for wear. Replace, if necessary.
12. Wire tie the compressor base plate to the compressor, and slide the new compressor into the unit. (See
Figure 7.5).

Figure 7.5 Compressor Kit

1 6
2
7
3

10
4
11

12
13
5
14

1) O-Ring (Unloader Connection) 7) O-Ring (Economizer Connection)

2) Teflon Seal for Valve 8) Teflon Seal for Valve Connection (2)
Connection (2) 9) Base Mounting Bolts
3) Compressor 10) SST Washers
4) Power Cable Gasket, Ground 11) Resilient Mount
Connection Screw 12) SST Washers
5) Power Cable Lubricant - 13) Mylar Washers
Krytox (not shown)
14) Wire Ties
6) Compressor Discharge
Temperature Sensor
-----
13. Cut and discard the wire ties used to hold the base plate to the compressor.
14. Place the new SST washers on each side of the resilient mounts, and the new Mylar washer on the bottom
of it as shown in Figure 7.5. Install the four base mounting bolts loosely.
15. Place the new Teflon seals at the compressor suction and discharge ports as well as the O-rings at the
unloader and economizer line connection ports. Hand tighten all four connections.
16. Torque the four base-mounting screws to 6.2 mkg (45 ft-lbs).
17. Torque the compressor ports / connections.

Service Valve / Connection Torque Value

Suction and Discharge Rotalocks 108.5 to 135.5 Nm (80 to 100 ft-lbs.)
Unloader connection 24.5 to 27 Nm (18 to 20 ft-lbs.)
Economized connection 32.5 to 35 Nm (24 to 26 ft-lbs.)

18. Connect (butt-splice and heat shrink) the new compressor dome temperature sensor with the old sensor
wires removed in step 8. Wire-tie any loose wiring as appropriate.
19. Evacuate the compressor to 1000 microns if the unit was pumped down before the replaced compressor
was removed. Otherwise, evacuate the complete unit and charge it with refrigerant (see Section 7.6.1 and
Section 7.7.1).

7–9 T-372
 20. Open the compressor terminal cover and connect the compressor power cable following the steps below:
a. Liberally coat the orange gasket surfaces with the Krytox lubricant.
b. Install the orange gasket part onto the compressor fusite with the grooved or threaded side out. Ensure
that the gasket is seated onto the fusite base.
c. Coat the inside of the power plug (female) connector pins with the Krytox lubricant, and insert the plug
onto the compressor terminal connections. Make sure the orange gasket has bottomed out onto the
fusite and fits securely onto the terminal pins while fully inserted into the orange plug.
d. Connect the green ground wire to the grounding tab located inside the terminal box of the compressor
using the self-tapping grounding screw. Close the compressor terminal box using the terminal cover
removed in step 20.
21. Backseat all service valves, connect the power to the unit and run for at least 20 minutes.
22. Perform a leak check of the system.

7.10 High Pressure Switch

7.10.1 Checking High Pressure Switch

! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.

NOTE
The high pressure switch is non-adjustable.
1. Remove switch as outlined in Figure 7.10.2.
2. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across switch terminals. Ohm meter will indicate no resistance or
continuity light will be illuminated if the switch closed after relieving compressor pressure.
3. Connect hose to a cylinder of dry nitrogen (see Figure 7.6).

Figure 7.6 High Pressure Switch Testing

1
5
2
6
3

7
4

1) Cylinder Valve 5) Pressure Gauge

2) Cylinder Gauge (0 to 36 kg/cm2 = 0 to 400 psig)
3) Pressure Regulator 6) Bleed-Off Valve
4) Nitrogen Cylinder 7) 1/4 inch Connection
-----
4. Set nitrogen pressure regulator at 26.4 kg/cm2 (375 psig) with bleed-off valve closed.
5. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve.
6. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve to increase pressure on switch. The switch should open at
a static pressure up to 25 kg/cm2 (350 psig). If a light is used, the light will go out. If an ohmmeter is used,
the meter will indicate open circuit.
7. Slowly open bleed-off valve to decrease the pressure. The switch should close at 18 kg/cm2 (250 psig).

T-372 7–10
7.10.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch
1. Remove the refrigerant charge.
2. Disconnect wiring from defective switch. The high pressure switch is located on the discharge connection or
line and is removed by turning counterclockwise.
3. Install a new high pressure switch after verifying switch settings.
4. Evacuate, dehydrate and recharge the system.
5. Start the unit, verify refrigeration charge and oil level.

7.11 Condenser Coil

The condenser coil consists of a series of parallel copper tubes expanded into copper fins and formed into a “C”
shape with the fourth side of the square formed by the side support bracket.

7.11.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning

To ensure optimal efficiency of the unit the condenser coil must be clean. The condenser coil should be cleaned at
least once a year, but more frequent cleaning may be required depending on operating conditions. The coil is
cleaned with fresh water sprayed in the reverse direction of the air flow to remove any debris from the coil. A high
pressure washer is not required, mains water pressure is sufficient.

! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power plug.

1. Make sure the unit is powered off and the plug is disconnected.
2. Remove the condenser fan grille.
3. Starting from the top of the coil, use a water hose with a nozzle to wash the coil from the inside out.
4. Systematically wash across the inside top face of the coil until the water runs clean.
5. Wash down the center section, and then through the bottom of the coil. Continue washing until the water
runs clear.
6. After the coil is clean, rinse the condenser fan to remove any dirt build up from the blades.
7. Replace the condenser fan grille ensuring that it is centered around the fan.

7.11.2 Condenser Coil Removal

1. Using a refrigerant reclaim system remove the refrigerant charge.

! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power plug.

2. Remove the condenser fan grille. Retain all bolts and washers for reuse.
3. Remove the condenser fan.
4. Remove the infill panels to the left and right of the condenser fan shroud.
5. Remove the condenser fan shroud.
6. Unplug the condenser fan motor.
7. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around the motor wire harness to allow the harness to be slid back
through the side support bracket.
8. Cut the top and bottom drain lines midway between the side support bracket and the first cable tie,
approximately 150mm (6”) from the side support bracket.
9. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around the drain lines to allow the tubes to be slid back through the
side support bracket.
10. Remove the filter drier.

7–11 T-372
 11. Unbraze the inlet connection to the coil.
12. Remove the cushion clamps securing the liquid line to the top and bottom receiver brackets. Retain all
clamps and securing hardware.
13. Place a support under the condenser coil before releasing the coil from the frame.
14. Remove the lower mounting bracket bolts from the inside of the coil.
15. Remove the top mounting bracket bolts and grille extension mount from inside the coil.
16. Remove the side support bracket mounting bolts.
17. Slide the condenser assembly with the receiver out of the unit.

7.11.3 Condenser Coil Preparation

Before installing the new condenser coil, the receiver assembly and mounting hardware must be removed from the
old coil assembly.
1. From the old coil, unbolt the receiver assembly from the side support bracket.
2. Unbraze the receiver assembly from the coil outlet line and remove from the coil assembly.
3. Unbolt the side support bracket from the top and bottom coil supports and remove from the old coil.
4. Refit the side support bracket to the new coil ensuring that the top and bottom are flush mounted with the
coil support.

7.11.4 Condenser Coil Installation

Once the side support bracket has been secured to the new condenser coil, the entire assembly is ready to be
installed into the unit.
1. Slide the new condenser coil into place ensuring the coil inlet connection is mated to the pipework and that
the coil is fully supported.
2. Secure the condenser coil into the unit using the retained hardware; refit the mylar and fender washers:
a. Refit the side support bracket bolts.
b. Refit the top support bracket bolts as well as the top grille extension support.
c. Refit the bottom support bracket bolts.
3. Braze the condenser coil inlet connection.
4. Insert the receiver pipe work onto the coil outlet and loosely secure the receiver assembly to the side
support bracket with the retained hardware.
5. Braze the outlet connection to the receiver assembly.
6. Install a new filter drier.
7. Replace the liquid line cushion clamps.
8. Secure the receiver assembly to the side support bracket.
9. Pressure / leak test the coil and filter drier connections. See Section 7.5.
10. Evacuate the entire unit. See Section 7.6.
11. Slide the top and bottom drain lines back into place through the side support bracket.
12. Using the two supplied straight connectors and contact adhesive, reconnect the drain lines.
13. Slide the condenser fan motor wiring harness back through the side support bracket and refit to the
condenser motor.
14. Replace all wire ties that were removed to properly secure the drain line and wiring.
15. Reseal the wire harness and drain line penetrations with the putty.
16. Slide the condenser fan onto the motor shaft reversed but do not secure.
17. Refit the condenser fan shroud to the unit. Use the condenser fan as a guide to ensure the shroud is
properly centered around the fan.
18. Remove the condenser fan, and place it on the shaft facing the correct direction. Adjust the fan to the
correct position, 37mm (1.5”) from the fan shroud, see Figure 7.7.

T-372 7–12
 Figure 7.7 Condenser Fan Position

37mm (1.5”)

Fan

Shroud

19. Use Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and tighten.
20. Refit left and right infill panels.
21. Refit the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille is properly centered around the condenser fan.
22. Evacuate the entire unit. See Section 7.6.
23. Recharge the unit with the charge shown on the unit serial plate. See Section 7.7. It is important for proper
unit operation that the charge is weighed into the unit.

7.12 Condenser Fan and Fan Motor

The condenser fan rotates counter-clockwise (viewed from front of unit). The fan pulls air through the condenser
coil, and discharges the air horizontally through the front of the unit.

7.12.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove and Replace

! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power plug.
1. Remove the condenser fan grille. Retain all bolts and washers for reuse.
2. Remove the condenser fan by loosening the two set screws.
3. Disconnect the condenser fan motor wiring.

! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.
4. Note the number of shims on each side of the motor as the same configuration will be required to refit the
new motor.
5. Remove the fan motor mounting hardware and remove the motor.
6. Loosely mount the new motor using new lock nuts.
7. Connect the fan motor wiring to the new fan motor.
8. Replace the shims in the same configuration as they were removed.
9. Tighten the fan motor mounting bolts to properly secure the motor.

7–13 T-372
 10. To make sure that the motor is aligned properly, slide the condenser fan onto the motor shaft reversed but
do not secure.
11. Rotate the fan to make sure the fan blades do not contact the shroud:
• If the fan motor is misaligned vertically, add or remove shims to align.
• If the fan motor is not properly centered, loosen the mounting bolts, and adjust the motor position on the
bracket, and then secure the motor.
12. Remove the condenser fan, and connect the fan motor wiring to the fan motor.
13. Place the condenser fan on the shaft facing the correct direction. Adjust the fan to the correct position,
37mm (1.5”) from the fan shroud, see Figure 7.7.
14. Use Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and tighten.
15. Refit the left and right infill panels.
16. Refit the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille is properly centered around condenser fan.

7.13 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning

The water-cooled condenser is of the shell and coil type with water circulating through the cupro-nickel coil. The
refrigerant vapor is admitted to the shell side and is condensed on the outer surface of the coil.
Rust, scale and slime on the water-cooling surfaces inside of the coil interfere with the transfer of heat, reduce sys-
tem capacity, cause higher head pressures and increase the load on the system.
By checking the leaving water temperature and the actual condensing temperature, it can be determined if the con-
denser coil is becoming dirty. A larger than normal difference between leaving condensing water temperature and
actual condensing temperature, coupled with a small difference in temperature of entering and leaving condensing
water, is an indication of a dirty condensing coil.
If the water-cooled condenser is dirty, it may be cleaned and de-scaled.

7.13.1 Cleaning Supplies Needed

• Oakite Aluminum Cleaner® 164, available as a powder in 20 kg (44 lb) pails and 205 kg (450 lb) drums.
• Oakite Composition No. 32, available as a liquid in cases, each containing 3.785 liters (4 U.S. gallon) bottles
and also in carboys of 52.6 kg (116 lbs) net.
• Fresh clean water.
• Acid proof pump and containers or bottles with rubber hose.

NOTE
When Oakite Compound No. 32 is used for the first time, the local Oakite technical service representative
should be called in for suggestions in planning the procedure. The representative will advise the reader on
how to do the work with a minimum dismantling of equipment: how to estimate the time and amount of
compound required; how to prepare the solution; how to control and conclude the de-scaling operation by
rinsing and neutralizing equipment before putting it back into service. The representative’s knowledge of
metals, types of scale, water conditions and de-scaling techniques will be highly useful.

7.13.2 Cleaning Procedure Summary

1. Turn the unit off and disconnect main power.
2. Disconnect the water pressure switch tubing by loosening the two flare nuts. Install a 1/4 inch flare cap on
the water-cooled condenser inlet tube (replaces tubing flare nut). De-scale tubing if necessary.
3. Drain water from the condenser tubing circuit.
4. Clean the water tubes with Oakite Aluminum Cleaner® 164 to remove mud and slime.
5. Flush.
6. De-scale the water tubes with Oakite No. 32 to remove scale.
7. Flush.
8. Neutralize.

T-372 7–14
 9. Flush.
10. Put the unit back in service under normal load and check head (discharge) pressure.

7.13.3 Cleaning Procedure Detailed

1. Drain and flush the water circuit of the condenser coil. If scale on the tube inner surfaces is accompanied by
slime, a thorough cleaning is necessary before de-scaling process can be accomplished.
2. To remove slime or mud, use Aluminum Cleaner® 164. Mix 170 grams (6 ounces) per 3.785 liters (1 U.S.
gallon) of water. Mix cleaner in one half the volume of water, while stirring, and then add remaining water.
Warm this solution and circulate through the tubes until all slime and mud has been removed.
3. After cleaning, flush the tubes thoroughly with fresh clean water.
4. Prepare a 15% by volume solution for de-scaling, by diluting Oakite Compound No. 32 with water. This is
accomplished by slowly adding 0.47 liter (1 U.S. pint) of the acid (Oakite No. 32) to 2.8 liters (3 U.S. quarts)
of water.

! WARNING
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT PUT
WATER INTO THE ACID - this will cause spattering and excessive heat.

! WARNING
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution from the skin immediately if accidental contact
occurs. Do not allow the solution to splash onto concrete.

5. Fill the tubes with this solution by filling from the bottom. See Figure 7.8.

Figure 7.8 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning - Forced Circulation

5 7
1
6 8

3
10

4 11

12

1) Pump 7) Vent
2) Suction 8) Close vent pipe valve when pump is
3) Tank running
4) Pump support 9) Condenser
5) Priming Connection (Centrifugal pump 10) Remove water regulating valve
50 gpm at 35’ head) 11) Return
6) Globe valves 12) Fine mesh screen
-----

NOTE
It is important to provide a vent at the top for escaping gas.

7–15 T-372
 6. Allow the Oakite No. 32 solution to soak in the tube coils for several hours, periodically pump-circulating it
with an acid-proof pump.
An alternate method may be used whereby a pail (see Figure 7.9) filled with the solution and attached
to the coils by a hose can serve the same purpose by filling and draining. The solution must contact the
scale at every point for thorough de-scaling. Air pockets in the solution should be avoided by regularly
opening the vent to release gas. Keep flames away from the vent gases.
7. The time required for de-scaling will vary, depending upon the extent of the deposits. One way to determine
when de-scaling has been completed is to titrate the solution periodically, using titrating equipment provided
free by the Oakite technical service representative. As scale is being dissolved, titrate readings will indicate
that the Oakite No. 32 solution is losing strength. When the reading remains constant for a reasonable time,
this is an indication that scale has been dissolved.

Figure 7.9 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning - Gravity Circulation

Fill condenser with cleaning solution. Do not add

solution more rapidly than vent can exhaust gases
caused by chemical reaction.
1” pipe
Approximately 5’

Vent pipe

3’ to 4’

Condenser

8. When de-scaling is complete, drain the solution and flush thoroughly with water.

NOTE
If condenser cooling water is not being used as drinking water or is not re-circulated in a closed or tower system,
neutralizing is not necessary.
9. Following the water flush, circulate a 56.7 gram (2 ounce) per 3.785 liter (1 U.S. gallon) solution of Oakite
Aluminum Cleaner® 164 through the tubes to neutralize. Drain this solution.
10. Flush the tubes thoroughly with fresh water.
11. Put the unit back in service and operate under normal load. Check the head pressure. If normal, a thorough
de-scaling has been achieved.
What You Can Do For Further Help:
Contact the Engineering and Service Department of OAKITE PRODUCTS CO., 675 Central Avenue, New Provi-
dence, NJ 07974 U.S.A. (or visit www.oakite.com)

7.14 Filter Drier

On units equipped with a water-cooled condenser, if the sight glass appears to be flashing or bubbles are con-
stantly moving through the sight glass, the unit may have a low refrigerant charge or the filter drier could be par-
tially plugged.

7.14.1 Checking the Filter Drier:

1. Test for a restricted or plugged filter drier by feeling the liquid line inlet and outlet connections. If the outlet
side feels cooler than the inlet side, then the filter drier should be changed.
2. Check the moisture-liquid indicator. If the indicator shows a high level of moisture, the filter drier should be
replaced.

T-372 7–16
7.14.2 Replacing the Filter Drier:
1. Pump down the unit (see Section 7.4). If the unit is not equipped with service values, evacuate the unit.
Then replace filter drier.
2. Evacuate the low side in accordance with Section 7.6.
3. After unit is in operation, inspect for moisture in the system and check charge.

7.15 Evaporator Coil

The evaporator section, including the evaporator coil, should be cleaned regularly. The preferred cleaning fluid is
fresh water or steam. Another recommended cleaner is Oakite 202 or similar, following manufacturer’s instructions.
The two drain pan hoses are routed behind the condenser fan motor and compressor. The drain pan line(s) must
be open to ensure adequate drainage.

7.15.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement

1. Pump unit down. (See Section 7.4).

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

2. With power OFF and power plug removed, remove the screws securing the panel covering the evaporator
section (upper panel).
3. Disconnect the defrost heater wiring.
4. Remove the mounting hardware from the coil.
5. Unsolder the two coil connections, one at the distributor and the other at the coil header.
6. Disconnect the defrost temperature sensor (see Section 7.28) from the coil.
7. Remove middle coil support.
8. After defective coil is removed from unit, remove defrost heaters and install on replacement coil.
9. Install coil assembly by reversing above steps.
10. Leak check connections. Evacuate and add refrigerant charge.

7.16 Evaporator Heaters

Figure 7.10 Heater Arrangement

1) Heater Element 3) Retainer

2) Bracket
-----

7–17 T-372
The heaters are wired directly back to the contactor and if a heater failure occurs during a trip, the heater set containing
that heater may be disconnected at the contactor.
The next pre-trip (P1) will detect that a heater set has been disconnected and indicate that the failed heater should be
replaced.

7.16.1 Megger Testing the Heaters

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.
All of the checks performed during this procedure should be carried out using a 500v Meg-ohm tester.
1. Connect the ground wire from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point, preferably the ground plate in the
control box.
2. At the load side of the heater contactor, check the insulation resistance to ground.
If readings are > 2 Mohm, then the heaters are operating properly and no action is needed.
If readings are < 1 Mohm, then the faulty heater needs to be identified. Proceed to step 3 for units with a
heater access panel or step 4 for units without a heater access panel.
If readings are between 1 and 2 Mohm, then the heaters need to be re-tested with the following steps:
a. Reconnect the unit to power and power the unit on.
b. Set the unit set point to a minimum of 10°C higher than the current temperature of the container. Allow
the unit to go into heat mode, reach the temperature set point and maintain for 10-15 minutes.
c. Power the unit off. Allow the unit to cool to ambient temperature.
d. Connect the ground wire from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point, preferably the ground plate in
the control box.
e. At the load side of the heater contactor, check the insulation resistance to ground.
If readings are > 1 Mohm, then the heaters are operating properly and no action is needed.
If readings are < 1 Mohm, then the faulty heater needs to be identified. Proceed to step 3 for units
with a heater access panel or step 4 for units without a heater access panel.

3. Identify the faulty heater(s) for units with a heater access panel:
a. Open the access panel and cut out all wire splices to isolate all heaters inside of the unit.
b. Repeat the Megger test on each individual heater. Connect the ground clip to the outer metal sheath of
the heater and the test clip to one of the wires from the same heater.
c. Replace any heater where the readings are < 1 Mohm.

4. Identify the faulty heater(s) for units without a heater access panel:
a. Remove all six connections from the Heater (HR) contactor load side, which splits the six heaters into
three separate pairs.
b. Identify the following three wires: DHTL, DHML, DHBL. There is one from each load connection.
c. Repeat the Megger test on each pair of heaters to identify the faulty heater pair. Connect the ground clip
from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point on the unit, preferably the ground plate in the control
box. Connect the test clip to one of the wires stated above.
d. Test all three wires and replace any heater pair that has readings < 1 Mohm.

5. If the unit is loaded, and the heater can not be immediately replaced, perform the following steps:
a. Identify the wire at the opposite end of the faulty heater pair: DHTL - DHTR, DHML - DHMR, DHBL -
DHBR.
b. Isolate the two wires.

T-372 7–18
 c. Reconnect the remaining good wiring pairs to their original connections.
d. The unit will fail the PTI test P1-0 at the next pre-trip inspection. Repair action can be taken at that time.

6. If the unit is empty, replace the faulty heater:

! WARNING
Before servicing the unit, make sure the circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and start-stop switch
(ST) are in the OFF position and the power plug is disconnected.
a. With the heater pair identified, remove the upper back panel inside the container.
b. Identify the center point connection for the heater pair (black wiring from heaters) either against the unit
back wall or in the wiring loom.
c. Cut the splice to separate the two heaters.
d. Carry out a Megger check on the two heaters in the same way as for units with heater panel. Replace
any heater where the Megger readings are < 1 Mohms.

NOTE
If all heaters are above the acceptable limit with the wiring disconnected, then this indicates that the
fault was in one or more of the wire splices that were removed.
e. Remove the hold-down clamp securing the heater(s) to the coil.
f. Verify that the heaters are not hot before handling them.
g. Lift the bent end of the heater (with the opposite end down and away from the coil). Move the heater to
the side enough to clear the heater end support and remove.
h. To install heater, reverse steps.
i. Reconnect all wiring using new splices and heat shrink where needed. The heat shrink MUST have a
'melt-able' liner to ensure that the connections are properly sealed when shrunk. This can be seen as a
'Ring' of melt liner pushed from under the heat shrink at each end of the shrink tube.

NOTE
Failure to use melt liner heat shrink allows moisture to 'wick' up under the heat shrink and cause a
leakage path.

7.17 Evaporator Fan and Motor Assembly

The evaporator fans circulate air throughout the container by pulling air in at the top of the unit. The air is forced
through the evaporator coil where it is either heated or cooled and then discharged out the bottom of the refrigera-
tion unit into the container. The fan motor bearings are factory lubricated and do not require additional grease.

7.17.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

1. Remove the access panel by removing the mounting bolts and TIR locking device. Reach inside of the unit
and remove the Ty-Rap securing the wire harness loop. Disconnect the connector by twisting to unlock and
pulling to separate.
2. Loosen the four 1/4-20 clamp bolts that are located on the underside of the fan deck at the sides of the fan
assembly. Slide the loosened clamps back from the fan assembly.
3. Slide the fan assembly out from the unit and place on a sturdy work surface.

7–19 T-372
7.17.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly
1. Attach a spanner wrench to the two 1/4-20 holes located in the fan hub. Loosen the 5/8-18 shaft nut by
holding the spanner wrench stationary and turning the 5/8-18 nut counter-clockwise (see Figure 7.11).
2. Remove the spanner wrench. Use a universal wheel puller and remove the fan from the shaft. Remove the
washers and key.
3. Remove the four 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts that are located under the fan that support the motor and stator
housing. Remove the motor and plastic spacer.

7.17.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly

1. Assemble the motor and plastic spacer onto the stator.

NOTE
When removing the black nylon evaporator fan blade, care must be taken to assure that the blade is not
damaged. In the past, it was a common practice to insert a screwdriver between the fan blades to keep it from
turning. This practice can no longer be used, as the blade is made up of a material that will be damaged. It is
recommended that an impact wrench be used when removing the blade. Do not use the impact wrench when
reinstalling, as galling of the stainless steel shaft can occur.
2. Apply Loctite to the 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts and torque to 0.81 mkg (70 inch-pounds).
3. Place one 5/8 flat washer on the shoulder of the fan motor shaft. Insert the key in the keyway and lubricate
the fan motor shaft and threads with a graphite-oil solution (such as Never-seez).
4. Install the fan onto the motor shaft. Place one 5/8 flat washer with a 5/8-18 locknut onto the motor shaft and
torque to 40 foot-pounds.

Figure 7.11 Evaporator Fan Assembly

3
4
2

1) Stator 5) Screws / Washers

2) Fan 6) Protector
3) Washer 7) Motor
4) Nut
-----

T-372 7–20
 5. Install the evaporator fan assembly in reverse order of removal. Torque the four 1/4-20 clamp bolts to 0.81
mkg (70 inch-pounds). Connect the wiring connector.
6. Replace the access panel making sure that the panel does not leak. Make sure that the TIR locking device
is lockwired. Torque the access panel hardware to 69 kg-cm (60 in/lbs.) using a crossing pattern as shown in
Figure 7.12. Repeat the pattern twice for a proper seal.

Figure 7.12 Access Panel Torque Pattern

7.18 Evaporator Section Cleaning

Containers and Container units that are exposed to certain fumigants may develop visible surface corrosion. This
corrosion will show up as a white powder found on the inside of the container and on the reefer unit evaporator sta-
tor and fan deck.
Analysis by Carrier Transicold environmental specialists have identified the white powder as consisting predomi-
nantly of aluminum oxide. Aluminum oxide is a coarse crystalline deposit most likely the result of surface corrosion
on the aluminum parts within the container. If left untreated over time, it may build up in thickness and eventually
flake as a light-weight white powder.
The surface corrosion of aluminum is brought about by exposure to chemicals such as sulfur dioxide and possibly
other fumigants that are commonly used for fumigation and protection of some perishable cargo such as grapes,
for example. Fumigation is the process by which a chemical is released into an enclosed area to eliminate infesta-
tions of insects, termites, rodents, weeds and soil-born disease.
Typically any aluminum oxide that becomes detached from evaporator fan stators will be blown into the wet evapo-
rator coil where it will be caught and then flushed out of the unit during routine defrost cycles.
However, it is still highly recommended that after carrying cargo subject to fumigation procedures, that the inside of
the unit be thoroughly cleansed prior to reuse.
Carrier Transicold has identified a fully biodegradable and environmentally safe alkaline cleaning agent (Tri-Pow’r®
HD) for the unit. This will assist in helping to remove the corrosive fumigation chemicals and dislodging of the cor-
rosive elements. This cleaner is available from the Carrier Transicold Performance Parts Group (PPG) and can be
ordered through any of the PPG locations; Part Number NU4371-88.
As a general safety precaution, before using this product, refer to and retain the Material Safety Data (MSDS) sheet.

7.18.1 Cleaning Preparation

• Always wear goggles, gloves and work boots.
• Avoid contact with skin and clothing, and avoid breathing mists.
• When mixing, add water to the sprayer first, then the cleaner.
• ALWAYS provide for proper ventilation when cleaning indoor evaporator coils (rear doors must be open).
• Be aware of surroundings - food, plants, etc., and the potential for human exposure.
• Always read directions and follow recommended dilution ratios. More is not always better. Using non-diluted
cleaner is not recommended.

7–21 T-372
7.18.2 Cleaning Procedure
1. Remove the upper evaporator access panel inside of the unit.
2. Spray the surface with water before applying the cleaning solution. This helps the cleaner work better.
3. Liberally apply the prepared cleaner solution (5 parts water and 1 part cleaner).
4. Allow the cleaner to soak in for five to seven minutes.
5. Assess area for rinsing. Follow all local regulations regarding disposal of waste water.
6. Thoroughly rinse the cleaner and surrounding area, floor, etc. When rinsing where heavy foaming solution is
present, it is very important to take the time to thoroughly rinse the equipment and surroundings.
7. Always rinse the empty coil cleaner bottle, cap tightly and dispose of properly.

7.19 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)

The electronic expansion valve (EEV) is an automatic device which maintains required superheat of the refrigerant
gas leaving the evaporator. The valve functions are: (a) automatic response of refrigerant flow to match the evapo-
rator load and (b) prevention of liquid refrigerant entering the compressor. Unless the valve is defective, it seldom
requires any maintenance.

7.19.1 Removing an EEV

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

1. Pump down the compressor (see Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves.
2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
3. Remove the coil.
4. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the valve is to cut the connection between the brazed
section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove the valve.
Alternatively, use a wet rag to keep the valve cool. Heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and
remove valve.
5. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary.

7.19.2 Installing an EEV

1. Install the valve and a new strainer with the cone of the strainer / screen pointing into the liquid line at the
inlet to the valve.
2. During installation, make sure the EEV coil is snapped down fully, and the coil retention tab is properly
seated in one of the valve body dimples. Also, ensure that coil boot is properly fitted over valve body. See
Figure 7.13.
3. Replace the filter drier.
4. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing the vacuum pump on the liquid line and suction service valve.
5. Open the liquid line service valve and check refrigerant level.
6. Check superheat. See Section 3.2.
7. Check unit operation by running a pre-trip. See Section 4.6.

T-372 7–22
 Figure 7.13 Electronic Expansion Valve

Flow
Direction

1) Coil Boot 3) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)

2) Coil 4) Strainer
-----

7.20 Humidity Sensor

The humidity sensor is an optional component that allows setting of a humidity set point in the controller. In dehu-
midification mode, the controller will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.

7.20.1 Checking the Operation of the Humidity Sensor

This procedure is to be performed in an effort to ease the troubleshooting of the humidity sensor. When performing
this procedure and while working on the unit, always follow the proper lockout/tagout procedures.

Items Required:

• One 7/16” socket wrench or nut driver.

• One 1/4” socket wrench or nut driver.
• One clean, clear water bottle with a minimum 6 cm (2.5 in) opening and capacity to hold 500 ml (16.9 oz).
• 100 ml (3.4 oz) of fresh water - distilled if available.
• 50 gm of Salt (NaCl).

Procedure:

1. Remove the left Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent panel.

2. Remove the humidity sensor from the mounting hardware and bring to the front of the access panel.
3. Disconnect the humidity sensor from the harness.
4. Drill a 3 cm (1.25 in) hole in the cap of a bottle.
5. Pour approximately 100 ml (3.4 oz) of water into the empty clean bottle.
6. Add salt to the water until it is present at the bottom of the bottle.
7. Cap the bottle and tape over the drilled hole.
8. Shake the bottle until the salt dissolves and water is saturated.

NOTE
To ensure saturation, add additional salt until it settles at the bottom without dissolving while shaking.

7–23 T-372
 9. Remove the cap and insert the humidity sensor into the bottle through the bottle opening and pull the connector
back through the drilled hole in the cap. Then, secure the cap and seal the wire going through the cap.

NOTE
Make sure that the sensor is not at all in contact with the salt water.

Figure 7.14 Humidity Sensor

1 2

1) Cap opening (6 cm) 3) Humidity Sensor (HS)

2) Cap hole (3 cm) 4) Salt water solution
-----
10. Allow the saturated salt mixture to settle for approximately ten minutes.
11. Reconnect the humidity sensor to the harness and power the reefer unit on.
12. Press the CODE SELECT key on the keypad.
13. Use the Arrow keys until “Cd17” is displayed then press the ENTER key.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

14. This displays the humidity sensor reading. Verify the reading is between 60% and 85% relative humidity.
15. If the humidity sensor display is outside of this range, reconfirm the salt mixture and retest. If not in range,
replace the sensor at the next opportunity.
16. Wipe clean and reinstall the humidity sensor and access panel. Torque the access panel hardware to 69 kg-
cm (60 in.-lbs.) using a crossing pattern similar to the numbering below.

Figure 7.15 Access Panel Torque Sequence

17. If the panel gasket is damaged, replace it.

T-372 7–24
7.21 Economizer Solenoid Valve
7.21.1 Removing a Solenoid Valve Coil

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

1. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit. Disconnect leads.
2. Remove the top screw and o-ring. Remove the coil and save mounting hardware, seals and spacer for
reuse (see Figure 7.16). See Valve Coil Installation Procedure.

Figure 7.16 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)

4
5

1) Slotted Screw 4) Bottom Coil (large) O-ring

2) Top Coil (small) O-ring 5) Brass Spacer
3) Solenoid Coil, Enclosing Tube
and Body
-----

7.21.2 Removing the Solenoid Valve

1. Pump down the compressor (see Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves.
2. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the solenoid valve is to cut the connection between
the brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove valve.
Alternatively, heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and remove valve.
3. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary.

7.21.3 Installing the Solenoid Valve

1. Fit the new solenoid valve into position and braze. Use a wet rag to keep valve cool whenever brazing.

7.21.4 Installing the Solenoid Valve Coil

1. Install the brass spacer on the valve stem.
2. Lubricate both o-rings with silicone provided in the kit.
3. Install bottom coil o-ring on the valve stem.
4. Install the solenoid coil on the valve stem.
5. Place the top coil o-ring on the coil mounting screw and secure the coil to the valve using a torque wrench.
Torque the screw to 25 in-lbs.
6. Connect coil wires using butt-splices and heat shrink tubing.

7–25 T-372
7.22 Economizer Expansion Valve
The economizer expansion valve (see Figure 7.17) is an automatic device that maintains constant superheat of
the refrigerant gas leaving at the point of bulb attachment, regardless of suction pressure.
Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires maintenance other than periodic inspection to ensure that the ther-
mal bulb is tightly secured to the suction line and wrapped with insulating compound.

NOTE
The economizer expansion valve is a hermetic valve, it does not have adjustable superheat.

Figure 7.17 Economizer Expansion Valve

Inlet

Outlet

7.22.1 Removing the Economizer Expansion Valve

1. Pump down the compressor (see Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves. If unit is not
equipped with service valves, evacuate unit. See Section 7.6.1.
2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
3. Remove cushion clamps located on the inlet and outlet lines.
4. Remove insulation (Presstite) from the expansion valve bulb.
5. Unstrap the bulb, located on the economizer line.
6. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the valve is to cut the connection between the brazed
section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove valve. Alternatively, use a wet rag to keep valve
cool. Heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and remove valve.
7. Clean the valve stem with a mild cleaner, if necessary.

7.22.2 Installing the Economizer Expansion Valve

1. The economizer expansion valve should be wrapped in a soaked cloth for brazing.
2. Braze the inlet connection to the inlet line.
3. Braze the outlet connection to the outlet line.
4. Reinstall the cushion clamps on the inlet and outlet lines.
5. Replace the filter drier. See Section 7.14.
6. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing vacuum pump on liquid line and suction service valve.
7. Check economizer expansion valve superheat (see Section 3.2).

7.23 Troubleshooting P6-7 (DUV)

A failed digital unloader valve (DUV), which is normally closed, or an internal seal failure of the compressor can
result in the unit running continually in the fully loaded mode causing it to undershoot its setpoint temperature.
Both of these conditions can be evaluated by running pre-trip test P6-7. When running P6-7, the controller is look-
ing for the differences in pressure and current draw between loaded mode and unloaded mode to make a judg-
ment. If there are no differences, then it will show fail.

T-372 7–26
To confirm what caused the test to fail, perform the following additional test.
1. Connect the manifold gauge set to discharge service valve (DSV) and suction service valve (SSV).
2. Front seat the SSV and pump down the compressor.
3. Front seat the DSV valve to isolate the compressor.
4. Disconnect the DUV from the top of compressor and install a 1/2 to 1/4 flared adapter / O-ring (P/N 40-
50076-00sv).

Figure 7.18 Adapter and O-Ring

1/2” 1/4”

O-Ring

5. Using refrigerant (R-134a or R-513A as specified for the unit model number) or Nitrogen, pressurize the line
to 50 psi (3.5 bar) at the adapter connection and close supply at the tank. Pressure should hold as the valve
is normally closed. If pressure drops, check for leaks at the installed fitting (part number 40-50076-00sv);
repair and retest. If pressure increases at the suction service valve and decreases at the pressure supply;
the valve is leaking and should be replaced. If no leak proceed to step 6.
6. Energize the DUV by removing the coil and placing a magnet on the valve stem opening the valve. If the
pressure does not increase at the SSV and decrease at the supply, replace the valve as it did not open.
If a magnet is not available, a jumper procedure can be used as follows:
1. Remove all four controller fuses (F1, F2, F3a, F3b).
2. Remove the KA6 wire from the KA controller connector on the front of the controller.
3. Disconnect the X1 wire from the 24VAC side of the transformer (black wire) and locate it away from the
transformer.
4. Jumper between the black transformer wires to the KA6 wire removed from the connector.
5. Connect power to the unit and turn the circuit breaker on. The DUV coil is now energized.
6. Pressure should drop.
7. Power the circuit breaker off, reconnect wires and reinstall fuses.
8. If the valve opens and closes properly, the failure mode is with the compressor and it should be changed at
the earliest opportunity.

7.24 Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)

7.24.1 Removing the DUV
1. Pump down the compressor (see Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves. In the event
the DUV is stuck open and compressor cannot pump down, remove charge.

! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or
discharge service valves closed (frontseated). Internal damage will result from operating the
compressor in a deep vacuum.
2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
3. Loosen the bolt on top of the DUV and remove the coil assembly.

7–27 T-372
 NOTE
There is a small spacer tube between the top of the valve and the 12 VDC coil that needs to be reinstalled into
the solenoid valve coil. When removing the coil, it may fall out when lifted from the valve body. Take care that the
spacer is not lost; the valve will not function correctly without it.
4. Remove the clamps holding the DUV to the discharge line.
5. Loosen the nuts attaching the DUV to the top of the compressor.
6. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the solenoid valve is to cut the connection between
the brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove valve. (see Figure 7.19).
Alternatively, use a wet rag to keep valve cool. Heat outlet connection to valve body and remove valve.

Figure 7.19 View of Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) Assembly

4 5

6
3

1) O-ring (hidden) 4) Screen Valve Strainer

2) Sleeve 5) Tube
3) Hex Nut, 1/2 OD 6) Solenoid Valve Body
-----
7. Examine the compressor and service valves. Ensure that the o-ring is not stuck in the gland of the valve.
8. Discard the o-ring on the o-ring face seal connection.

7.24.2 Installing the DUV

1. Lubricate the gland shoulder area and o-ring with refrigerant oil.
2. Fit the new valve in position and hand-tighten the o-ring nut.
3. Use a wet rag to keep the valve cool while brazing. Braze the DUV to service valve connection.
4. Reinstall and tighten the brackets that secure the valve body to the discharge line.
5. Torque the o-ring face seal connections to 18 to 20 ft-lbs.
6. Install the coil onto the valve body and tighten the attachment bolt.

NOTE
Confirm that the small spacer tube is inserted into the coil prior to attaching it to the valve body. The valve will not
function correctly without it.
7. Leak check and evacuate the low side of unit as applicable. See Section 7.6.1.
8. Open the service valves.

7.25 Valve Override Controls

Controller function code Cd41 is a configurable code that allows timed operation of the automatic valves for trou-
bleshooting. Test sequences are provided in Table 7–1. Capacity mode (CAP) allows alignment of the economizer
solenoid valve in the standard and economized operating configurations. DUV Capacity Modulation% Setting
(PCnt) and Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) allows opening of the digital unloader valve and electronic expansion
valve, respectively, to various percentages. If the unit is equipped with an LIV, the Liquid Valve Setting allows the
LIV to be automatically controlled, or manually opened and closed.
The Override Timer (tIM) selection is also provided to enter a time period of up to five minutes, during which the over-
ride(s) are active. If the timer is active, valve override selections will take place immediately. If the timer is not active,
changes will not take place for a few seconds after the timer is started. When the timer times out, the override function

T-372 7–28
is automatically terminated and the valves return to normal machinery control. To operate the override:
1. Press the CODE SELECT key.
2. Use the Arrow keys until Cd41 is displayed in the left window. The right window will display a controller
communications code.
3. Press the ENTER key. The left display will show a test name alternating with the test setting or time remaining.
4. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to the desired test, and then press the ENTER key. “SELCt” will appear in the
left display.
5. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting, and then press the ENTER key. Selections available for
each of the tests are provided in Table 7–1.
6. If the timer is not operating, follow the above procedure to display the timer. Use an Arrow key to scroll to the
desired time interval and press the ENTER key to start the timer.
7. The above described sequence may be repeated during the timer cycle to change to another override.

Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays for Cd41 “SELCt”

Controller Communication Codes (Right Display) Setting Codes (Right Display)
tIM 0 00 (0 minutes/0 Seconds)
(Override Timer) In 30 second increments to
5 00 (5 minutes/ 0 seconds)
PCnt AUtO (Normal Machinery Control),
(% Setting - DUV Capacity Modulation) 0, 3, 6, 10, 25, 50, 100
EEV AUtO (Normal Machinery Control)
(% Setting - Electronic Expansion Valve) CLOSE (Closed)
0, 3, 6, 10, 25, 50, 100
CAP AUtO (Normal Control)
(Capacity Mode) Std; UnLd (Economizer = Closed)
ECOn (Economizer = Open)

7.26 Autotransformer
If the unit does not start, check the following:
1. Verify the 460 VAC (yellow) power cable is plugged into the receptacle (see Figure 7.20) and locked in place.
2. Verify that circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 are in the “ON” position. If the circuit breakers do not hold in,
check voltage supply.
3. Using a voltmeter, and with the primary supply circuit ON, check the primary (input) voltage (460 VAC). Next,
check the secondary (output) voltage (230 VAC). The transformer is defective if output voltage is not available.

Figure 7.20 Autotransformer

1) Circuit Breaker (CB-2) 230-Volt 3) 460 VAC Power Receptacle

2) Dual Voltage Autotransformer
-----

7–29 T-372
7.27 Controller
7.27.1 Handling Modules

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from circuit boards unless you are grounded to the unit frame
with a static safe wrist strap or equivalent static drain device.

! CAUTION
Remove the controller module and unplug all connectors before performing any arc welding
on any part of the container.
The guidelines and cautions provided herein should be followed when handling the modules. These precautions
and procedures should be implemented when replacing a module, when doing any arc welding on the unit, or when
service to the refrigeration unit requires handling and removal of a module.
1. Obtain a grounding wrist strap (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00304-00) and a static dissipation mat (Carrier
Transicold P/N 07-00277-00). The wrist strap, when properly grounded, will dissipate any potential static
buildup on the body. The dissipation mat will provide a static-free work surface on which to place and/or
service the modules.
2. Disconnect and secure power to the unit.
3. Place strap on wrist and attach the ground end to any exposed unpainted metal area on the refrigeration
unit frame (bolts, screws, etc.).
4. Carefully remove the module. Do not touch any of the electrical connections if possible. Place the module
on the static mat.

NOTE
The strap should be worn during any service work on a module, even when it is placed on the mat.

7.27.2 Controller Troubleshooting

For reference of the controller location in the control box, see Section 3.1.7.
For a description of the controller software, see Section 4.2.
See function code Cd74 (see Section 4.9) for controller self diagnostic test.

7.27.3 Loading Controller Operational Software from a USB Drive

1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to turn the unit On. Wait for controller information to be displayed.
2. Insert the USB flash drive, containing controller software, into the controller micro USB port.
3. Press the ALT. MODE key on the keypad.
4. Use the Arrow keys until “USb” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.

NOTE
If “no USb” is displayed, wait up to 15 seconds for this message to be replaced with a different message. If “no
USb” continues to be displayed, remove and insert the USB flash drive and repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Use the Arrow keys until “UP LoAd” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.
6. “LOAd XXXX” is now on the display. If more than one ML5 software revision file is on the USB flash drive at
the root level, press the Arrow keys until the desired revision is displayed.
7. Press the ENTER key to load the software to the controller.
8. When “PULL USB NOW” is displayed, remove the USB drive from the port.
9. The following messages will appear to confirm successful programming: “LoAd SoFt” and “Pro SoFt” will
each appear for several seconds and then “Restart” appears briefly. Then, the controller restarts.
10. As the controller starts up, the message “Cd 18” displays the new software loaded and then “Pro donE”
appears.

T-372 7–30
7.27.4 Uploading a Software Configuration from a USB Drive
1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to turn the unit On. Wait for controller information to be displayed.
2. Insert the USB flash drive containing the software configuration files into the controller micro USB port. The
software multi-configuration files will have an extension of .ml5.
3. Press the ALT. MODE key on the keypad.
4. Use the Arrow keys until “USb” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.

NOTE
If “no USb” is displayed, wait up to 15 seconds for this message to be replaced with a different message. If “no
USb” continues to be displayed, remove and insert the USB flash drive and repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Use the Arrow keys until “SEt UP” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.
6. Use the Arrow keys until “ruN COnFG” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.

NOTE
If more than one configuration database file is on the USB flash drive at the root level, then only the file with the
latest date will be considered.
7. The display module will go blank briefly and then display “551000”, based on the operational software
installed.
8. Use the Arrow keys to scroll through the list to obtain the proper model number, then press the ENTER key.
9. Once the model number is selected, the display will show the message “re Start” briefly, and then the
controller will restart.
10. Remove the USB flash drive from the USB port.
11. Use the Arrow keys to navigate to function code Cd20 and confirm that the correct model configuration is
displayed. The model displayed in Cd20 should match what is shown on the unit nameplate.

7.27.5 Downloading DataCORDER Data to a USB Drive

1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to turn the unit On. Wait for controller information to be displayed.
2. Insert the designated USB flash drive into the controller micro USB port.
3. Press the ALT. MODE key on the keypad.
4. Use the Arrow keys until “USb” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.

NOTE
If “no USb” is displayed, wait up to 15 seconds for this message to be replaced with a different message. If “no
USb” continues to be displayed, remove and insert the USB flash drive and repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Use the Arrow keys until “dn LoAd” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.
6. The Download Menu is now displayed. The amount of free space available on the drive is displayed first.
Use the Arrow keys to scroll down through the choices: ALL, trIP, 30dAy, 60dAy, and 90dAy.
7. Confirm the selection by pressing the ENTER key. The download starts.
8. While the download is in progress, the display will show “dLOAd” flashing.
9. When the download is complete, the display will show “dLOAd donE”.
10. Remove the USB flash drive from the USB port.

7.27.6 Setting the Date and Time

1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to turn the unit On. Wait for controller information to be displayed.
2. Insert the designated USB flash drive into the controller micro USB port.

NOTE
The USB must have an ML5 software file or ML5 configuration file on the root level. If not, the “SEt UP” menu will
not be accessible from underneath the “USb” menu.

7–31 T-372
 3. Press the ALT. MODE key on the keypad.
4. Use the Arrow keys until “USb” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.

NOTE
If “no USb” is displayed, wait up to 15 seconds for this message to be replaced with a different message. If “no
USb” continues to be displayed, remove and insert the USB flash drive and repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Use the Arrow keys until “SEt UP” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.
6. Use the Arrow keys until “SEt tIM” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.
7. The date values are displayed in YYYY MM-DD format. Configure the date using the keypad.
• The values will be edited from left to right: the year first (YYYY), then month (MM) and then day (DD).
• Press the Arrow keys to increase or decrease a date value.
• Press the ENTER key to confirm the date value being modified and bring up the next value for editing.
• Press the CODE SELECT key to return to the previous date value.
8. Once date editing is complete and the day (DD) value is selected, press the ENTER key.
9. The time values are now displayed in HH MM format. Configure the time using the keypad.
• The values will be edited from left to right: the hours first (HH), then minutes (MM).
• Press the Arrow keys to increase or decrease a time value.
• Press the ENTER key to confirm the time value being modified and bring up the next value for editing.
• Press the CODE SELECT key to return to the previous time value.
10. Once time editing is complete, with the minutes (MM) value active, press the ENTER key.
11. The display returns to the USb menu. The date and time will be committed when the ENTER key is pressed.

7.27.7 Setting the Container ID

This procedure explains how to set the Container ID, which can be found in Function Code Cd40 (See Section
4.9). The characters will be preset to the container ID of the box that the refrigeration unit was originally commis-
sioned in. If no ID has been loaded, Cd40 will show dashes as the ID will be invalid.
1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to turn the unit On. Wait for controller information to be displayed.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into the controller micro USB port. The USB must have an ML5 software file or
ML5 configuration file on the root level. If not, the “SEt UP” menu will not be accessible from underneath the
“USb” menu.
3. Press the ALT. MODE key on the keypad.
4. Use the Arrow keys until “USb” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.

NOTE
If “no USb” is displayed, wait up to 15 seconds for this message to be replaced with a different message. If “no
USb” continues to be displayed, remove and insert the USB flash drive and repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Use the Arrow keys until “SEt UP” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.
6. Use the Arrow keys until “SEt Id” is displayed, then press the ENTER key. The current ID is displayed.
7. Configure the Container ID using the keypad.
• The first four characters are Alpha type and the last seven are numeric.
• The character being modified will always be on the right most position on the display.
• Press the Arrow keys to scroll through the selectable characters available.
• Press the ENTER key to confirm the choice and shift the selected character one position to the left to
modify the next character.
• Press the CODE SELECT key to shift the characters one position to the right (backspace) to modify the
previous character.
8. When the last value of Container ID is entered, press the ENTER key to enter the information to the controller.

T-372 7–32
7.27.8 Removing and Installing a Controller
Removal:
1. Disconnect all front wire harness connectors and move wiring out of the way.
2. The lower controller mounting is slotted. Loosen the top mounting screw (see Figure 4.1) and lift up and out.
3. Remove the module.
4. When removing the replacement module from its packaging, note how it is packaged. When returning the
old module for service, place it in the packaging in the same manner as the replacement. The packaging
has been designed to protect the module from both physical and electrostatic discharge damage during
storage and transit.
Installation:
1. Install the module by reversing the removal steps.
2. Torque values for mounting screws (see Figure 4.1) are 0.23 mkg (20 inch-pounds). Torque value for the
connectors is 0.12 mkg (10 inch-pounds).

7.27.9 Battery Replacement

The Carrier rechargeable battery pack part # is 79-04262-01.
1. Turn unit power Off and disconnect the power supply.
2. Open the control box door and remove both the high voltage shield and clear plastic rain shield (if installed).
3. Disconnect the battery connection at the "BA" connector and carefully remove wire ties along the battery
wires leading back to the battery pack.

4. Using a Driver Bit, Carrier Transicold part number 07-00418-00, loosen the left hand screw on the battery
pack cover then remove the second screw on the outer edge of the battery pack cover.

5. Remove the old battery from the bracket and assemble the new battery to the bracket.
6. Secure the battery wires from the battery along the previous route and then reconnect the BA connector.
Heat shrink a ferrite clamp to the harness to reduce electromagnetic voltage transients onto this interface.

7–33 T-372
 7. Replace wire ties that were removed. Replace shields and close the control panel door.

7.28 Temperature Sensor Service

Service procedures for the return recorder, return temperature, supply recorder, supply temperature, ambient, defrost
temperature, evaporator temperature, and compressor discharge temperature sensors are provided in this section.

7.28.1 Ice Bath Preparation

The ice-water bath is a method for testing the accuracy of sensors by submerging the sensors in an insulated
container with ice cubes or chipped ice, then filling voids between ice with water and agitating until mixture reaches
0°C (32°F) measured on a laboratory thermometer.

Notes:
• Wherever possible, use a thermometer that is regularly calibrated by an accredited test lab. Contact your
instrument representative if the reference thermometer is not showing correct readings.
• Always use a temperature measurement reference instrument which is of higher accuracy than the device
checked – for e.g., a thermometer with a rated accuracy of +/- 0.2 °C should be used to check a device with
a rated accuracy +/- 0.3 °C.
• A thermally insulated container, tub open to atmosphere and large enough to contain crushed ice and water
should be used. The tub should be large enough to contain the unit’s sensor and the reference thermometer.
• Enough distilled water should be available to make ice cubes and to set up a proper and stable ice-water tri-
ple-point mixture. Prepare ice using distilled water.
• Pre-cool distilled water for testing.

Procedure:

1. Prepare a mixture of clean ice using distilled water in a clean insulated container. If possible, the person
handling should be wearing latex gloves.
a. Crush or chip the ice to completely fill the container. Finer ice particles will produce a more accurate mixture.
b. Add enough pre-cooled distilled water to fill the container.
c. Stir the mixture for a minimum of 2 minutes to ensure water is completely cooled and good mixing has
occurred.
d. The mixture should generally contain about 85% ice with distilled water occupying the rest of the space.
e. Add more ice as the ice melts.
2. Stir the ice water slurry mixture to maintain a temperature 0°C (32°F).
3. Constantly monitor the temperature of the ice water slurry with your reference thermometer. Ensure that the
temperature of the bath has stabilized. The criterion for stability generally is to take two readings at 1 minute
intervals, and the two readings should give you 0°C (32°F).

T-372 7–34
7.28.2 Sensor Checkout Procedure
This procedures is to be performed to verify the accuracy of a temperature sensor. This procedure describes how
to check using a ice-water bath and also by using an OHM check.
1. Remove the sensor and place in a 0°C (32°F) ice-water bath. The ice-water bath is prepared by filling an
insulated container (of sufficient size to completely immerse the bulb) with ice cubes or chipped ice, then
filling the voids between the ice with water and agitating until the mixture reaches 0°C (32°F) measured on a
laboratory thermometer.
2. Start the unit and check the sensor reading on the control panel. Readings should be 0°C (32°F).
If the reading is correct, reinstall the sensor. If the reading is incorrect, continue with the next step.
3. If the reading is off slightly, then re-calibrate. If the reading is not within 0°C (32°F) +/- 0.25 degrees, replace
the sensor and re-check.
4. A sensor can be tested against from the control box utilizing the carrier harness adapter.
The carrier harness adapter part numbers are 22-50485-00 (CA connector), 22-50486-00 (CC
connector) and 22-50487-00 (ME connector). All readings from the adapter will be resistance readings
with power removed and the harness disconnected from the ML5 controller.

5. Locate the proper wires to be ohmed on the system schematic and check against the temperature
resistance chart provided in Table 7–2 and Table 7–3. If unable to soak in an ice bath, the sensor resistance
can be compared against a calibrated sensor located with the sensor being tested.

NOTE
Performing resistance checks on the controller connector is discouraged due to potential damage to the pins.

Resistive Sensors:
• STS, SRS, RTS, RRS: ice-bath, GDP calibration, replace. Remove check against chart. Ambient - easy to
ice-bath check on display, if bad reading replace, remove ohm against chart.
• DTS: ice-bath check on display, if bad replace, can remove and check against chart.
• CPDS: remove from compressor, ice-bath check against display, if bad replace, can remove and check
against chart.
• ETS1 / ETS2: ice-bath check against display, if bad replace, can remove and check against
• USDA 1-4: ice-bath, GDP, remove at socket check resistance

7–35 T-372
 Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance - AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS
°C °F OHMS °C °F OHMS
-40 -40 336,500 6 42.8 24,173
-39 -38.2 314,773 7 44.6 23,017
-38 -36.4 294,600 8 46.4 21,922
-37 -34.6 275,836 9 48.2 20,886
-36 -32.8 258,336 10 50 19,900
-35 -31 242,850 11 51.8 18,975
-34 -29.2 228,382 12 53.6 18,093
-33 -27.4 214,164 13 55.4 17,258
-32 -25.6 200,909 14 57.2 16,466
-31 -23.8 188,545 15 59 15,715
-30 -22.0 177,000 16 60.8 15,002
-29 -20.2 166,360 17 62.6 14,325
-28 -18.4 156,426 18 64.4 13,683
-27 -16.6 147,148 19 66.2 13,073
-26 -14.8 138,478 20 68 12,494
-25 -13 130,374 21 69.8 11,944
-24 -11.2 122,794 22 71.6 11,420
-23 -9.4 115,702 23 73.4 10,923
-22 -7.6 109,063 24 75.2 10,450
-21 -5.8 102,846 25 77 10,000
-20 -4 97,022 26 78.8 9,572
-19 -2.2 91,563 27 80.6 9,164
-18 -0.4 86,445 28 82.4 8,777
-17 1.4 81,644 29 84.2 8,407
-16 3.2 77,139 30 86 8,055
-15 5 72,910 31 87.8 7,720
-14 6.8 68,938 32 89.6 7,401
-13 8.6 65,206 33 91.4 7,096
-12 10.4 61,699 34 93.2 6,806
-11 12.2 58,401 35 95 6,529
-10 14 55,330 36 96.8 6,265
-9 15.8 52,381 37 98.6 6,013
-8 17.6 49,634 38 100.4 5,772
-7 19.4 47,047 39 102.2 5,543
-6 21.2 44,610 40 104.0 5,323
-5 23 42,314 41 105.8 5,114
-4 24.8 40,149 42 107.6 4,914
-3 26.6 38,108 43 109.4 4,723
-2 28.4 36,182 44 111.2 4,540
-1 30.2 34,365 45 113 4,365
0 32 32,650 46 114.8 4,198
1 33.8 31,030 47 116.6 4,038
2 35.6 29,500 48 118.4 3,885
3 37.4 28,054 49 120.2 3,739
4 39.2 26,688 50 122 3,599
5 41 25,396

T-372 7–36
 Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance - PrimeLINE CPDS
°C °F OHMS °C °F OHMS
-40 -40 2,889,600 18 64.4 117,656
-38 -36.4 2,532,872 20 68.0 107,439
-36 -32.8 2,225,078 22 71.6 98,194
-34 -29.2 1,957,446 24 75.2 89,916
-32 -25.6 1,724,386 25 77 86,113
-30 -22.0 1,522,200 26 78.8 82,310
-28 -18.4 1,345,074 28 82.4 75,473
-26 -14.8 1,190,945 30 83.0 69,281
-24 -11.2 1,056,140 32 89.6 63,648
-22 -7.6 938,045 34 93.2 58,531
-20 -4.0 834,716 36 96.8 53,887
-18 -0.4 743,581 38 100.4 49,656
-16 3.2 663,593 40 104.0 45,812
-14 6.8 593,030 42 107.6 42,294
-12 10.4 530,714 44 111.2 39,078
-10 14.0 475,743 46 114.8 36,145
-8 17.6 426,904 48 118.4 33,445
-6 21.2 383,706 50 122.0 30,985
-4 24.8 345,315 52 125.6 28,724
-2 28.4 311,165 54 129.2 26,651
0 32.0 280,824 56 132.8 27,750
2 35.6 253,682 58 136.4 23,005
4 39.2 229,499 60 140.0 21,396
6 42.8 207,870 62 143.6 19,909
8 46.4 188,494 64 147.2 18,550
10 50.0 171,165 66 150.8 17,294
12 53.6 155,574 68 154.4 16,133
14 57.2 141,590 70 158.0 15,067
16 60.8 129,000 72 161.6 14,078

7.28.3 GDP Supply and Return Sensor Calibration

European Commission GDP (Good Distribution Practices) guidelines, which are used worldwide, call for the equip-
ment used to control or monitor environments where medicinal products are stored or transported be calibrated in
accordance with pharmaceutical shipper specifications, typically every six months or annually.
This procedure explains how to perform a GDP calibration of the supply (STS/SRS) and return (RTS/RRS) sensors
using DataLINE software version 3.1 or higher.
The calibration procedure should be conducted in pairs (STS/SRS, or RTS/RRS) and it is recommended to cali-
brate before the full pre-trip inspection.

! WARNING
Before removing the Supply or Return air sensors from the unit, turn the ON/OFF switch and
circuit breaker to the OFF position. Disconnect the power plug from the unit. Follow proper
lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot inadvertently be energized. It is
important that all dismantling work is done and tools and personnel are away from the unit
before powering on the unit for calibration.

7–37 T-372
 ! WARNING
When performing the Return Air Sensor calibration, disconnect both evaporator motors.

Before proceeding with the calibration procedure, ensure that controller software version is 5368 or higher and
DataLINE version 3.1 or higher is installed onto the download device. Only the latest DataLINE and controller
software will allow users to carry out Good Distribution Practice (GDP) calibration. Do not downgrade the
software after installing the latest software.
Before proceeding with the calibration procedure, it is recommended to check the sensors by running pre-trip
P5-0. This test checks the sensor values. If the test fails, identify and correct the faulty sensor and rerun the test.

Tools Required:
• Socket screwdrivers set
• Phillips screwdriver
• Standard hand tools
• Interrogator cable
• Laptop with DataLINE 3.1 or above installed
• Clean insulated container for distilled water and ice
• A regularly calibrated reference thermometer, recommended to be of accuracy up to 2 decimal places.

GDP Calibration, Removing Supply Sensors (STS/SRS) from Unit:

1. Locate the supply sensors cover assembly on the suction side of the compressor. Remove the two
fasteners securing the cover of the sensors (see Figure 7.21).
2. Remove the cover and rotate the supply air sensors, STS/SRS, in a clockwise direction and remove the
sensors from the sensor housing (see Figure 7.21).

Figure 7.21 Supply Sensors - Cover Assembly and Sensors

T-372 7–38
GDP Calibration, Removing Return Sensors (RTS/RRS) from Unit:
1. Remove both front access panels from the unit by removing 8 fasteners from each panel (see Figure 7.22).
Save all hardware for re-installation.
Figure 7.22 Removing Front Access Panels

2. On the right side, disconnect the fan motor wiring, loosen the fastener and remove (slide) the evaporator
motor from the unit (see Figure 7.23).

Figure 7.23 Removing Evaporator Motor

3. Loosen the fastener on the sensor bracket (see Figure 7.24).

Figure 7.24 Return Sensors - Bracket

7–39 T-372
 4. Cut all the wire ties (see Figure 7.25) that are securing the sensors to the harness and remove sensor.
Figure 7.25 Return Sensors - Cutting Wire Ties

GDP Calibration, Perform Calibration:

1. Connect the interrogator cable to the interrogator port. Then, power on the unit.

! WARNING
Before powering on the unit, it is important to ensure that all dismantling work is done and
tools are away and service personnel are not working on the unit at the time of power on.

2. Open DataLINE version 3.1 or above. From the DataLINE launch pad, click on the Probe Calibration button
(see Figure 7.26) to go to the Probe Calibration screen. A pop-up window will appear reminding the user to
ensure proper ice bath temperature. Click OK to acknowledge.
Figure 7.26 DataLINE - Probe Calibration

T-372 7–40
3. On the Probe Calibration screen, click on the Calibrate Supply sensors or Calibrate Return sensors button
(see Figure 7.27).
Figure 7.27 DataLINE - Calibrate Sensors Button

4. A Location of Service pop-up window will appear (see Figure 7.28). In the appropriate fields, enter the
Service Center Name and Service Center Location where the calibration is being performed. Then, click the
Save button. A pop-up window will appear reminding the user to ensure proper ice bath temperature. Click
OK to acknowledge and remember to maintain the Ice bath at 0°C (32°F).
Figure 7.28 DataLINE - Enter Service Center Information

5. Prepare the ice bath. Refer to the Ice bath preparation procedure.
Ensure that the set-up (i.e. ice bath, sensors, reference thermometer) has reached a stable state before
beginning the calibration process. Ensure that the set-up is clean and the reference thermometer is
regularly maintained and calibrated.

7–41 T-372
 6. Place the ice bath in a location near sensors (see Figure 7.29). For Return Sensors, place the ice bath on
an elevated platform (ladder) of appropriate height.

Figure 7.29 Ice Bath

7. Once temperature stability is ensured, submerge the sensors in the ice water slurry. Make certain that the
sensors do not contact the container sides or bottom, or each other. Continuously stir the slurry mixture
during calibration.
8. Ensure that the Ice bath is at 0°C (32°F) using the calibrated reference thermometer. Confirm that the
sensor readings have stabilized and the sensors are within +/- 0.3°C (0.5°F). The readings can be taken
from the Uncal column in the Current Probe Offset Temperatures table.
9. Then, after confirming the sensor readings have stabilized, click on the Start Cal button (see Figure 7.30).
After clicking Start Cal, the process begins automatically and will complete in less than 5 minutes.
Figure 7.30 DataLINE - Start Cal Button

10. Continue to stir the ice bath during the testing. Calibration will fail if the stability cannot be achieved or the
sensor offset is greater than 0.3°C (0.5°F). Replace the sensor and recalibrate the sensors. See the
Section 7.28.4 for sensor replacement procedures.

T-372 7–42
 11. Once the calibration has completed, a pop-up will appear with the message Calibrate Complete. Click OK to
acknowledge and the results will then be displayed on the screen in the Results column (see Figure 7.31).
Figure 7.31 DataLINE - Calibration Results

12. After completing the calibration event, download a DCX file and check that all of the following information is
captured: service center name, location, the results of the calibration and the offset applied. Ensure that all
the information is captured and the event is considered a success when all the intended sensors in
calibration have passed.
13. After the completion of the calibration, restore the unit to its original state.

7.28.4 Sensor Replacement

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breaker (CB-1) and disconnect main power supply before
removing electrical parts.

1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn the unit Off. Disconnect the power supply.

NOTE
Include white date code label when cutting out and removing defective sensors. The label could be required for
warranty returns.
2. Cut the cable. Slide the cap and grommet off the bulb type sensor and save for reuse. Do not cut the
grommet.
3. Cut one wire of existing cable 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) shorter than the other wire.
4. Cut the replacement sensor wires (opposite colors) back 40 mm (1-1/2 inches). See Figure 7.32.

7–43 T-372
 Figure 7.32 Sensor Types

40 mm (1 1/2 in)
Sensor 2 or 3 wires as
required

6.3 mm (1/4 in)

Sensor 40 mm (1 1/2 in)

2 or 3 wires as
required

6.3 mm (1/4 in)

5. Strip back insulation on all wiring 6.3 mm (1/4 inch).

6. Slide a large piece of heat shrink tubing over the cable, and place the two small pieces of heat shrink tubing,
one over each wire, before adding crimp fittings as shown in Figure 7.33.

Figure 7.33 Sensor and Cable Splice

3 4

1) Sensor (typical) 3) Cable

2) Large Heat Shrink Tubing (1) 4) Heat Shrink Tubing, 2 or 3 as required
-----
7. If required, slide the cap and grommet assembly onto the replacement sensor.
8. Slip crimp fittings over dressed wires (keeping wire colors together). Make sure wires are pushed into crimp
fittings as far as possible and crimp with crimping tool.
9. Solder spliced wires with a 60% tin and 40% lead Rosincore solder.
10. Slide heat shrink tubing over each splice so that ends of tubing cover both ends of crimp as shown in Figure 7.33.
11. Heat tubing to shrink over splice.Make sure all seams are sealed tightly against the wiring to prevent
moisture seepage.

! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance.
12. Slide large heat shrink tubing over both splices and shrink.

T-372 7–44
 13. Position sensor in unit as shown in Figure 7.33 and re-check sensor resistance:
Figure 7.35 - Return Sensor Positioning
Figure 7.34 - Supply Sensor Positioning
Figure 7.36 - ETS Sensor Positioning
14. Reinstall sensor. Refer to:
Section 7.28.5 - For STS and SRS Reinstallation
Section 7.28.6 - For RRS and RTS Reinstallation
Section 7.28.7 - For DTS Reinstallation
Section 7.28.8 - For ETS1 and ETS2 Reinstallation

NOTE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to deactivate probe alarms (see Section 5.8).

7.28.5 Sensor STS and SRS Reinstallation

To properly position a unit supply sensor (Supply Temperature Sensor STS or Supply Recorder Sensor SRS), the
sensor must be fully inserted into the probe holder. This positioning will give the sensor the optimum amount of expo-
sure to the supply air stream, and will allow the Controller to operate correctly. Insufficient probe insertion into the
probe holder will result in poor temperature control due to the lack of air flow over the sensor.
It is also necessary to ensure that the probe tip does not contact the back panel. The design minimum clearance of
6 mm (1/4 inch) should be maintained (see Figure 7.34).

Figure 7.34 Supply Sensor Positioning

Supply Air
Stream

5 6mm (1/4”)

1) Sensor Wire 4) Evaporator Back Panel

2) Cap & Grommet Assembly 5) Supply Sensor
3) Probe Holder
-----

7.28.6 Sensor RTS and RRS Reinstallation

Reinstall the return sensor (Return Temperature Sensor RTS or Return Recorder Sensor RRS), as shown in Fig-
ure 7.35. For proper placement of the return sensor, be sure to position the enlarged positioning section of the sen-
sor against the side of the mounting clamp.

7–45 T-372
 Figure 7.35 Return Sensor Positioning

1 2 1.5 in (38.1 cm)

1) Mounting Clamp 2) Return Sensor

-----

7.28.7 Sensor DTS Reinstallation

The Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) must have insulating material placed completely over the sensor to ensure
the coil metal temperature is sensed.

7.28.8 Sensor ETS1 and ETS2 Reinstallation

The Evaporator Temperature Sensors, ETS1 and ETS2 are located in a tube holder under insulation, as illustrated
in Figure 7.36. When the combo sensor is removed and reinstalled, it must be placed in a tube holder by applying
thermal grease. Insulating material must completely cover the sensor to ensure the correct temperature is sensed.

Figure 7.36 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Positioning

2 1 .0 ”
25.4cm
3

1) Insulation 3) ETS1 and ETS2

2) ETS Tube Holder 4) Wire Tie
-----

7.28.9 Sensor, CPDS Reinstallation

To replace the Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor, see Figure 7.37.
1. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power source.
2. Verify that the Start-Stop switch (ST) is in the “0” position.
3. Remove the existing sensor.
4. Clean all silicone sealer and dielectric compound from the sensor well. Make sure that the well is clean and
dry. The top of the compressor, where the sensor seals, must also be clean and dry.
 Figure 7.37 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor

1) Sensor 3) Sensor Well

2) Silicon Bead
-----
5. Using the syringe supplied with the replacement sensor, squeeze all of the dielectric compound into the
sensor well.
6. Place a bead of the silicone sealer supplied with the replacement sensor around the sensor sealing ring.
Insert sensor into the well with the leads parallel to the suction fitting.
7. Reconnect the sensor (see Figure 7.33) and run pre-trip P5.

7.29 Vent Position Sensor (VPS)

The vent position sensor (VPS) determines fresh air vent position in near real-time via function code Cd45.
The fresh air vent position sensor alarm (AL250) will occur if the sensor reading is not stable for four minutes or if
the sensor is outside of its valid range (shorted or open). This can occur if the vent is loose or the panel is defec-
tive. To confirm a defective panel, assure that the wing nut is secure and then power cycle the unit. If the alarm
immediately reappears as active, the panel should be replaced.
The alarm should immediately go inactive. Check the four minute stability requirement. If the alarm reoccurs after
the four minutes and the panel was known to have been stable, then the sensor should be replaced.
In order to replace the Upper VPS, the panel must be removed and replaced with another upper fresh air panel
equipped with VPS. Upon installation, a new VPS assembly requires calibration.
1. Rotate the vent to the 0 CMH / CFM position. Cd45 will automatically display.
2. Press and hold the ENTER key for five seconds.
3. After the ENTER key has been pressed the display will read “CAL” (for calibration).
4. Press and hold the ALT MODE key for five seconds.
5. After the calibration has been completed, Cd45 will display 0 CMH / CFM.

7.30 EverFRESH Service

Procedures and technical information related to the EverFRESH controlled atmosphere system can be found in the
T-374 EverFRESH Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the
manual from the Literature section, click on Options > EverFRESH.

7.31 Maintenance of Painted Surfaces

The refrigeration unit is protected by a special paint system against the corrosive atmosphere in which it normally
operates. However, should the paint system be damaged, the base metal can corrode. In order to protect the refrig-
eration unit from the highly corrosive sea atmosphere, or if the protective paint system is scratched or damaged,
clean the area to bare metal using a wire brush, emery paper or equivalent cleaning method. Immediately following
cleaning, apply paint to the area, and allow to dry. Refer to the Parts List for proper paint selection.

7–47 T-372
 Table 7–4 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
-40 -40.0 14.8 -40 -40.0 -0.49
-38 -38.9 13.9 -39 -38.2 -0.46
-36 -37.8 13.0 -38 -36.4 -0.43
-34 -36.7 12.0 -37 -34.6 -0.40
-32 -35.6 10.9 -36 -32.8 -0.37
-30 -34.4 9.8 -35 -31.0 -0.34
-28 -33.3 8.7 -34 -29.2 -0.30
-26 -32.2 7.5 -33 -27.4 -0.27
-24 -31.1 6.3 -32 -25.6 -0.23
-22 -30.0 5.0 -31 -23.8 -0.20
-20 -28.9 3.7 -30 -22.0 -0.16
-18 -27.8 2.3 -29 -20.2 -0.12
-16 -26.7 0.8 -28 -18.4 -0.07
-14 -25.6 0.3 -27 -16.6 -0.03
-12 -24.4 1.1 -26 -14.8 0.02
-10 -23.3 1.9 -25 -13.0 0.06
-8 -22.2 2.8 -24 -11.2 0.11
-6 -21.1 3.6 -23 -9.4 0.16
-4 -20.0 4.6 -22 -7.6 0.22
-2 -18.9 5.5 -21 -5.8 0.27
0 -17.8 6.5 -20 -4.0 0.33
2 -16.7 7.5 -19 -2.2 0.39
4 -15.6 8.5 -18 -0.4 0.45
6 -14.4 9.6 -17 1.4 0.51
8 -13.3 10.8 -16 3.2 0.57
10 -12.2 11.9 -15 5.0 0.64
12 -11.1 13.1 -14 6.8 0.71
14 -10.0 14.4 -13 8.6 0.78
16 -8.9 15.7 -12 10.4 0.85
18 -7.8 17.0 -11 12.2 0.93
20 -6.7 18.4 -10 14.0 1.01
22 -5.6 19.9 -9 15.8 1.09
24 -4.4 21.3 -8 17.6 1.17
26 -3.3 22.9 -7 19.4 1.25
28 -2.2 24.5 -6 21.2 1.34
30 -1.1 26.1 -5 23.0 1.43
32 0.0 27.8 -4 24.8 1.53
34 1.1 29.5 -3 26.6 1.62
36 2.2 31.3 -2 28.4 1.72
38 3.3 33.1 -1 30.2 1.82
40 4.4 35.0 0 32.0 1.93

T-372 7–48
 Table 7–4 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
42 5.6 37.0 1 33.8 2.04
44 6.7 39.0 2 35.6 2.15
46 7.8 41.1 3 37.4 2.26
48 8.9 43.2 4 39.2 2.38
50 10.0 45.4 5 41.0 2.50
52 11.1 47.7 6 42.8 2.62
54 12.2 50.0 7 44.6 2.75
56 13.3 52.4 8 46.4 2.88
58 14.4 54.9 9 48.2 3.01
60 15.6 57.4 10 50.0 3.15
62 16.7 60.0 11 51.8 3.29
64 17.8 62.7 12 53.6 3.43
66 18.9 65.4 13 55.4 3.58
68 20.0 68.2 14 57.2 3.73
70 21.1 71.1 15 59.0 3.88
72 22.2 74.1 16 60.8 4.04
74 23.3 77.1 17 62.6 4.21
76 24.4 80.2 18 64.4 4.37
78 25.6 83.4 19 66.2 4.54
80 26.7 86.7 20 68.0 4.72
82 27.8 90.0 21 69.8 4.90
84 28.9 93.5 22 71.6 5.08
86 30.0 97.0 23 73.4 5.27
88 31.1 100.6 24 75.2 5.46
90 32.2 104.3 25 77.0 5.65
92 33.3 108.1 26 78.8 5.85
94 34.4 112.0 27 80.6 6.06
96 35.6 115.9 28 82.4 6.27
98 36.7 120.0 29 84.2 6.48
100 37.8 124.2 30 86.0 6.70
102 38.9 128.4 31 87.8 6.93
104 40.0 132.7 32 89.6 7.15
106 41.1 137.2 33 91.4 7.39
108 42.2 141.7 34 93.2 7.63
110 43.3 146.4 35 95.0 7.87
112 44.4 151.1 36 96.8 8.12
114 45.6 156.0 37 98.6 8.37
116 46.7 160.9 38 100.4 8.63
118 47.8 166.0 39 102.2 8.90
120 48.9 171.2 40 104.0 9.17
122 50.0 176.5 41 105.8 9.44
124 51.1 181.8 42 107.6 9.72

7–49 T-372
 Table 7–4 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
126 52.2 187.4 43 109.4 10.01
128 53.3 193.0 44 111.2 10.30
130 54.4 198.7 45 113.0 10.60
132 55.6 204.6 46 114.8 10.90
134 56.7 210.6 47 116.6 11.21
136 57.8 216.7 48 118.4 11.53
138 58.9 222.9 49 120.2 11.85
140 60.0 229.2 50 122.0 12.18
142 61.1 235.7 51 123.8 12.51
144 62.2 242.3 52 125.6 12.85
146 63.3 249.0 53 127.4 13.20
148 64.4 255.9 54 129.2 13.56
150 65.6 262.9 55 131.0 13.92
56 132.8 14.28
57 134.6 14.66
58 136.4 15.04
59 138.2 15.42
60 140.0 15.82
61 141.8 16.22
62 143.6 16.63
63 145.4 17.04
64 147.2 17.47
65 149.0 17.90
 Table 7–5 R-513A Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
-40 -40.0 9.8 -40 -40.0 -0.32
-38 -38.9 8.6 -39 -38.2 -0.28
-36 -37.8 7.4 -38 -36.4 -0.25
-34 -36.7 6.2 -37 -34.6 -0.21
-32 -35.6 4.9 -36 -32.8 -0.17
-30 -34.4 3.6 -35 -31.0 -0.13
-28 -33.3 2.2 -34 -29.2 -0.09
-26 -32.2 0.7 -33 -27.4 -0.05
-24 -31.1 0.4 -32 -25.6 0.00
-22 -30.0 1.1 -31 -23.8 0.04
-20 -28.9 1.9 -30 -22.0 0.09
-18 -27.8 2.8 -29 -20.2 0.14
-16 -26.7 3.7 -28 -18.4 0.19
-14 -25.6 4.6 -27 -16.6 0.25
-12 -24.4 5.5 -26 -14.8 0.30
-10 -23.3 6.5 -25 -13.0 0.36
-8 -22.2 7.5 -24 -11.2 0.42
-6 -21.1 8.5 -23 -9.4 0.48
-4 -20.0 9.6 -22 -7.6 0.54
-2 -18.9 10.7 -21 -5.8 0.61
0 -17.8 11.9 -20 -4.0 0.67
2 -16.7 13.1 -19 -2.2 0.74
4 -15.6 14.3 -18 -0.4 0.81
6 -14.4 15.6 -17 1.4 0.89
8 -13.3 16.9 -16 3.2 0.96
10 -12.2 18.3 -15 5.0 1.04
12 -11.1 19.7 -14 6.8 1.12
14 -10.0 21.1 -13 8.6 1.21
16 -8.9 22.6 -12 10.4 1.29
18 -7.8 24.2 -11 12.2 1.38
20 -6.7 25.8 -10 14.0 1.47
22 -5.6 27.5 -9 15.8 1.56
24 -4.4 29.2 -8 17.6 1.66
26 -3.3 30.9 -7 19.4 1.76
28 -2.2 32.7 -6 21.2 1.86
30 -1.1 34.6 -5 23.0 1.97
32 0.0 36.5 -4 24.8 2.07
34 1.1 38.5 -3 26.6 2.18
36 2.2 40.5 -2 28.4 2.30
38 3.3 42.6 -1 30.2 2.41
40 4.4 44.8 0 32.0 2.53

7–51 T-372
 Table 7–5 R-513A Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
42 5.6 47.0 1 33.8 2.65
44 6.7 49.3 2 35.6 2.78
46 7.8 51.6 3 37.4 2.91
48 8.9 54.0 4 39.2 3.04
50 10.0 56.5 5 41.0 3.18
52 11.1 59.0 6 42.8 3.32
54 12.2 61.6 7 44.6 3.46
56 13.3 64.3 8 46.4 3.60
58 14.4 67.0 9 48.2 3.75
60 15.6 69.8 10 50.0 3.91
62 16.7 72.7 11 51.8 4.06
64 17.8 75.7 12 53.6 4.22
66 18.9 78.7 13 55.4 4.39
68 20.0 81.8 14 57.2 4.56
70 21.1 85.0 15 59.0 4.73
72 22.2 88.2 16 60.8 4.91
74 23.3 91.6 17 62.6 5.09
76 24.4 95.0 18 64.4 5.27
78 25.6 98.5 19 66.2 5.46
80 26.7 102.1 20 68.0 5.65
82 27.8 105.7 21 69.8 5.85
84 28.9 109.5 22 71.6 6.05
86 30.0 113.3 23 73.4 6.26
88 31.1 117.3 24 75.2 6.47
90 32.2 121.3 25 77.0 6.68
92 33.3 125.4 26 78.8 6.90
94 34.4 129.6 27 80.6 7.13
96 35.6 133.9 28 82.4 7.36
98 36.7 138.3 29 84.2 7.59
100 37.8 142.8 30 86.0 7.83
102 38.9 147.4 31 87.8 8.07
104 40.0 152.0 32 89.6 8.32
106 41.1 156.8 33 91.4 8.57
108 42.2 161.7 34 93.2 8.83
110 43.3 166.7 35 95.0 9.10
112 44.4 171.8 36 96.8 9.37
114 45.6 177.0 37 98.6 9.64
116 46.7 182.3 38 100.4 9.92
118 47.8 187.7 39 102.2 10.21
120 48.9 193.3 40 104.0 10.50
122 50.0 198.9 41 105.8 10.79
124 51.1 204.7 42 107.6 11.10

T-372 7–52
 Table 7–5 R-513A Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
126 52.2 210.5 43 109.4 11.40
128 53.3 216.5 44 111.2 11.72
130 54.4 222.7 45 113.0 12.04
132 55.6 228.9 46 114.8 12.36
134 56.7 235.2 47 116.6 12.70
136 57.8 241.7 48 118.4 13.03
138 58.9 248.3 49 120.2 13.38
140 60.0 255.1 50 122.0 13.73
142 61.1 261.9 51 123.8 14.09
144 62.2 268.9 52 125.6 14.45
146 63.3 276.1 53 127.4 14.82
148 64.4 283.3 54 129.2 15.20
150 65.6 290.8 55 131.0 15.58
56 132.8 15.97
57 134.6 16.37
58 136.4 16.77
59 138.2 17.18
60 140.0 17.60
61 141.8 18.03
62 143.6 18.46
63 145.4 18.90
64 147.2 19.35
65 149.0 19.80

7–53 T-372
 Table 7–6 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel)
Bolt Diameter Threads In-Lbs Ft-Lbs N-m
Free Spinning
#4 40 5.2 0.4 0.6
#6 32 9.6 0.8 1.1
#8 32 20 1.7 2.3
#10 24 23 1.9 2.6
1/4 20 75 6.3 8.5
5/16 18 132 11 14.9
3/8 16 240 20 27.1
7/16 14 372 31 42
1/2 13 516 43 58.3
9/16 12 684 57 77.3
5/8 11 1104 92 124.7
3/4 10 1488 124 168.1
Non Free Spinning (Locknuts etc.)
1/4 20 82.5 6.9 9.3
5/16 18 145.2 12.1 16.4
3/8 16 264 22.0 29.8
7/16 14 409.2 34.1 46.2
1/2 13 567.6 47.3 64.1
9/16 12 752.4 62.7 85
5/8 11 1214.4 101.2 137.2
3/4 10 1636.8 136.4 184.9

T-372 7–54
 SECTION 8
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS
Figure 8.1 Legend - Standard Unit Configuration

8–1 T-372
 ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS
Figure 8.2 Schematic Diagram

Based on Drawing 62- 11957

T-372 8–2
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS
Figure 8.3 Unit Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)

Based on Drawing 62- 11957

8–3 T-372
 ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS
Figure 8.4 Unit Wiring Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)

Based on Drawing 62- 11957

T-372 8–4
 SECTION 9

EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We, manufacturer: Carrier Transicold Pte Ltd
251 Jalan Ahmad Ibrahim
Singapore 629146

Declare, under our sole responsibility, that the PrimeLINE Container Unit:

Model: 69NT40-571
is in conformity with the provisions of the following European Directives:
• Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC following Annex VIII
• Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU following Annex II
• Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU Annex II

The assembly was assessed for applicability under the Pressure Equipment Directive, 2014/68/EU, but determined
to be outside of the scope based on the exclusion indicated in PED Article 1, Paragraph 2.f. The assembly was
determined to be no higher than PED Category I and is covered by the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.

The following Harmonized Standards were applied for this equipment:

Machinery Directive EMC Directive RED Directive
EN 61000-6-4:2007
EN 61000-6-2:2005
EN 55011:2009
EN 61000-3-12:2011 EN 301 489-1 v2.2.0
EN ISO 12100:2010
EN 61000-4-2:2009 EN 300 328 V2.1.1
EN 60204-1:2006
EN 61000-4-3:2006 EN 301 489-17 V3.2.0
EN 13857:2008
EN61000-4-4:2004 EN 60950-1 +A2
EN 61000-4-5:2006
EN 61000-4-6:2009
EN 61000-3-11:2000

The following Technical Standards were applied for this equipment:

• ISO 1496-2:2008

Person established in Europe authorized to compile a copy of the Technical File:

Shaun Bretherton
Service Engineering Manager of CTL Rotterdam
Pittsburgstraat 21 3047 BL Rotterdam
Netherlands

9–1 T-372
 SECTION 10
WIRELESS CERTIFICATION

Product name: Micro-Link 5 Controller

Model name: ML5
Manufacturer: UTEC for Carrier Transicold Pte. Ltd
Made in China
CMIIT ID: XXXXXXXXXX
IC: 703A-MICROLINK5

FCC ID: KC Number: Anatel Number:

2AK6N-MICROLINK5 XXXXXXX-XXXXX HHHHH-AA-FFFFF

CCXXxxLPyyyZzW

R 006-XXXXXX XX-XXXX/XXXX
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.

Cet appareil contient des émetteurs / récepteurs exemptés de licence conformes aux RSS (RSS) d'Innovation, Sci-
ences et Développement économique Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférences.

2. Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences, y compris celles susceptibles de provoquer un
fonctionnement indésirable de l'appareil.

10–1 T-372
 China RoHS per SJ/T 11364-2014

(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr (VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)

O O O O O O
O O O O O O
X O O O O O
O O O O O O
O O O O O O
X O O O O O
O O O O O O
O O O O O O
X O O O O O
O O O O O O
X O O O O O
/ O O O O O O
O O X O O O
O O O O O O
X O O O O O
SJ/T 11364
O GB/T 26572
X GB/T 26572
62-66122-00, Rev A
 INDEX
Symbols Condenser Coil Service 7–11
3–3 Condenser Fan and Fan Motor Service 7–13
Condenser Fan Location 3–1, 3–3
Numerics Condenser Fan Motor Location 3–3
230 Volt Cable 2–3 Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace 7–13
460 Volt Cable 2–3 Condenser Grille 2–3
Condenser Grille and Venturi Assembly Location 3–3
A
Access Panels Location 3–1 Configuration Identification 2–1
Air-Cooled Condenser Section 3–3 Configuration Software (CnF Variables) 4–3
Alarm AL976 4–49 Container Unit Description, Front Section 3–1
Alarm AL977 4–50 Control Box 2–1
Alarm AL978 4–50 Control Box Component Location 3–6
Alarm AL979 4–50 Control Box Section 3–6
Alarm AL980 4–51 Control Panel Location 3–1
Alarm AL981 4–51 Controller 2–3, 7–30
Alarm AL982 4–51 Controller Alarm Indications 4–37
Alarm AL983 4–51 Controller Modules Handling 7–30
Alarm Code 4–13 Controller Operational Software Load From USB 7–30
ALARM light 4–13 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes 4–53
Alarm List 4–13 Controller Remove and Install 7–33
Alarm List Display Mode 4–13 Controller Software 4–3
Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS) Location 3–1 Controller Troubleshooting 7–30
Automatic Cold Treatment (ACT) 5–11 Controller Wired Communications 4–23
Automatic Pump Down 7–4 Controller Wireless Communications 4–23
Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) Cd53 5–13 Controller, Set the Container ID 7–32
Autotransformer 2–3 Controller, Set the Date and Time 7–31
Autotransformer Location 3–1 COOL light 4–11
Autotransformer Service 7–29 D
DataCORDER 5–5
B
Back Panels 2–3 DataCORDER Software Description 4–15
Battery 2–2, 7–33 DataLINE Connect (Android) 4–25
Battery Replace 7–33 DataLINE Connect (IOS) 4–24
Defrost 4–10
C Defrost Description 4–10
Cable Restraint 2–3 DEFROST light 4–11
Complete Inspection 5–5 Defrost Operation 4–10
Compressor 2–2 Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) Install 7–46
Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS) In- Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) Location 3–2
stall 7–46 Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) Operation 4–10
Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS) Lo- Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) Service 7–46
cation 3–3 Defrost Timer 4–12
Compressor Location 3–1, 3–3 Dehumidification 2–2, 4–6
Compressor Section Components 3–3 Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) Install 7–28
Compressor Service 7–8 Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) Location 3–3
Compressor Terminal Box Location 3–3 Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) Remove 7–27
Condenser Coil 2–2 Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) Service 7–27
Condenser Coil Cleaning 7–11 Discharge Connection Location 3–3
Condenser Coil Cover Location 3–3 Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) Location 3–3
Condenser Coil Install 7–12 Display Module 4–1, 4–2
Condenser Coil Location 3–3
Condenser Coil Preparation 7–12 E
Condenser Coil Remove 7–11 Economized Operation Description 3–10

Index–1 T-372
Economizer Connection Location 3–3 Frozen Steady State 4–8
Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV) Install 7–26 Function Codes, Check During Start-Up 5–4
Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV) Location 3–3 Fusible Plug Location 3–3
Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV) Remove 7–26
Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV) Service 7–26 G
GDP Sensor Calibration 7–37
Economizer Heat Exchanger Location 3–1
Economizer Location 3–3 H
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Install 7–25 Handles 2–3
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Location 3–3 HEAT light 4–11
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Remove 7–25 Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) Location 3–2
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) Service 7–25 High Pressure Switch (HPS) Location 3–3
Electrical Data 3–7 High Pressure Switch (HPS) Replace 7–11
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Description 3–10 High Pressure Switch (HPS) Service 7–10
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Install 7–22 Humidity Sensor (HS) Location 3–2
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Location 3–2 Humidity Sensor (HS) Troubleshooting 7–23
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Remove 7–22 Humidity Sensor (TS) Service 7–23
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Service 7–22
Evacuate and Dehydrate 7–5 I
Evacuate and Dehydrate - Complete System 7–5 Indicator Lights 4–2
Evacuate and Dehydrate - Partial System 7–6 Inspection 5–1
Evaporator 2–2 Interrogator 2–2
Evaporator Coil Heaters Location 3–2 Interrogator Connector Receptacle (ICR) Location 3–2
Evaporator Coil Location 3–2 Introduction 2–1, 9–1
Evaporator Coil Replace 7–17
Evaporator Coil Service 7–17
K
Keypad 4–1
Evaporator Fan #1 Location 3–2
Keypad Location 3–1
Evaporator Fan #2 Location 3–2
Evaporator Fan and Motor Assembly 7–19 L
Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–20 Labels 2–3
Evaporator Fan Assembly Replace 7–19
Evaporator Fan Operation 2–2, 4–12 M
Evaporator Heaters Megger Testing 7–18 Manifold Gauge Set 7–1
Evaporator Heaters Service 7–17 Manifold Gauge Set Evacuate 7–2
Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT) Location 3–3 Manifold Gauge Set Remove 7–3
Evaporator Section 3–2 Manifold Gauge Set, Connect 7–3
Evaporator Section Cleaning 7–21 Manual Pump Down 7–4
Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1/ETS2) Install 7– Micro-Link 5 Microprocessor 4–1
46 Microprocessor 4–1
Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1/ETS2) Loca- Modes of Operation 4–3
tion 3–2
O
F Oil Drain Location 3–3
Failure Action 4–12 Operating Precautions 1–1
Filter Drier Location 3–3 Operation 5–1
Filter Drier Replace 7–17 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) 4–3
Filter Drier Service 7–16 Options Label Location 3–1
First Aid 1–1
Fork Lift Pockets Location 3–1 P
Painted Surfaces 7–47
Fresh Air Makeup Vent 2–3, 3–2
Perishable Dehumidification 4–5
Fresh Air Makeup Vent Adjustment 5–2
Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode 4–6
Frozen “Heat” Mode 4–9
Perishable Economy 4–6
Frozen Economy Mode 4–9
Perishable Heating 4–4
Frozen Idle Mode 4–9
Perishable Idle, Air Circulation 4–4
Frozen Mode - Temperature Control 4–8
Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation 4–7
Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation 4–9

T-372 Index–2
Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation 4–8 Suction Connection Location 3–3
Perishable Mode Temperature Control 4–4 Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) Location 3–3
Perishable Pulldown 4–4 Suction Service Valve Location 3–3
Perishable Steady State 4–4 Supply Recorder Sensor (SRS) Install 7–45
Physical Inspection 5–4 Supply Recorder Sensor (SRS) Location 3–3
Plate Set 2–2 Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) Install 7–45
Power Cables and Plug Location 3–1 Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) Location 3–3
Pressure Readout 2–1
Pre-Trip 4–15 T
Temperature Control Microprocessor System 4–1
Pre-Trip Diagnosis 5–5
Temperature Readout 2–1
Probe Check 4–11
Temperature Sensor Service 7–34
Probe Diagnostics 5–7
TripWise (Option) 5–8
Protection Modes of Operation 4–12
Troubleshooting 6–1
Pump Down the Unit 7–3
Troubleshooting P6- 7 (DUV) 7–26
Push Button Switches 4–2

Q U
Unit Display Location 3–1
Quest - 2–2
Unit Nameplate Location 3–1
R Upper Air 2–3
Receiver Liquid Level / Moisture Indicator Location 3–3 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent 2–3, 5–2
Receiver Location 3–3 USDA 2–2
Receiver Sight Glass Location 3–3 USDA Probes Location 3–2
Refrigerant Charge, Checking 7–6
Refrigerant Leak Check 7–4 V
VAC Power, Connect to 190/230 5–1
Refrigerant, Adding Full Charge to System 7–7
VAC Power, Connect to 380/460 5–1
Refrigerant, Adding Partial Charge to System 7–7
Valve Override Controls 7–28
Refrigerant, Converting to R-513A 7–7
Vent Position Sensor (VPS) 5–3
Refrigeration Circuit Description 3–10
Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Service 7–47
Refrigeration System Data 3–7
Return Recorder Sensor (RRS) Install 7–45 W
Return Recorder Sensor (RRS) Location 3–2 Warning Label Location 3–3
Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) 4–12 Water Cooling 2–3
Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) Install 7–45 Water-Cooled Condenser (WCC) Cleaning 7–14
Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) Location 3–2 Water-Cooled Condenser (WCC) with Condenser Fan
Switch 5–4
S Water-Cooled Condenser (WCC) with Water Pressure
Safety and Protective Devices 3–9 Switch 5–4
Safety Notices 1–1 Water-Cooled Condenser, Connect 5–3
Safety Summary 1–1 Wireless 4–23
Sensor Checkout 7–35 Wireless Enable or Disable 4–24
Service 7–1 Wireless Settings Menu 4–23
Service Access Valve Location 3–3
Service Connections 7–2
Specific Hazard Statements 1–1
Standard Mode 4–17
Standard Operation Description 3–10
Start Temperature Recorder 5–5
Start Up - Compressor Bump Start 4–4
Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence 4–3
Starting and Stopping Instructions 5–4
Starting the Unit 5–4
Start-Stop Switch (ST) Location 3–1
Start-Up Inspection 5–4
Stopping the Unit 5–4

Index–3 T-372
Carrier Transicold Division,
Carrier Corporation
P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, NY 13221 USA

www.carrier.com/container-refrigeration/